JP6527980B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  A game medium such as a game ball is shot into a game area by a launch device as a game machine, and the game medium is won in a predetermined winning area (start winning hole) provided in the game area (start condition is satisfied) A variable display device capable of variably displaying (also referred to as "variation") identification information is provided, which is advantageous for the player when the display result of the variable display of identification information on the variable display device is a specific display result (big hit symbol) There is one that is configured to be controllable to the specific game state.

  Further, as a gaming machine as described above, there is a gaming machine which moves a reserve display corresponding to the fluctuation to a digestion display area or a prize as a digestion display, and displays a digestion display (for example, Patent Document 1) reference).

JP, 2013-66654, A

  However, even when the display at the time of digestion is displayed using the technology described in Patent Document 1, the player can be expected to have the expectation that the variation corresponding to the display at the time of digestion becomes the specific display result. As a result, the player's interest may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively improving a sense of expectation.

(A) The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and the gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention is a variable display (for example, a special display variable display, a decorative display variable display, a special display A game machine (eg, game machine 1 etc.) capable of controlling figures and decorative symbols etc. and controlling them in an advantageous state (eg, big hit gaming state, positive change state, time saving state etc.) advantageous to the player , Hold storage means for storing information on variable display as hold storage (for example, first special view reserve storage unit 151A, second special view reserve storage unit 151B, first start winning reception command buffer 194A, second start winning time a reception command buffer 194B, etc.), the hand upon a hold display unit, the variable display start of performing the hold display corresponding to pending memory stored in the hold memory means, holding table corresponding to the variable display Between the special image display means for displaying the special image according to the predetermined image and the display mode of the special image during execution of the variable display and the case where the display mode of the special image is not changed A common effect that can be executed a plurality of times during the variable display, and a successful effect or a display mode of the special image that changes the display mode of the special image to any of a plurality of types after the common effect is executed. Of a plurality of timings including a first timing during execution of one variable display, and a second timing after the first timing, and effect execution means capable of executing failure effects not changing the The ratio of changing the display mode of the special image to which display mode differs according to which timing the common effect is to be performed, and When the common effect is performed at two timings, the ratio at which the success effect is performed is higher than when the common effect is performed at the first timing, and the second timing is one variable display According to another aspect of the invention , there is provided a gaming machine, wherein the timing is after the mode has become the reach mode.

  According to such a configuration, since the player's sense of expectation can be effectively improved, the player's interest can be improved.

(1) A game machine according to another aspect of the present invention is a start condition which allows the start of variable display (for example, variable display of special drawing, variable display of decorative symbol, special display and variable display of decorative symbol, etc.) When the variable display is performed based on the establishment and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (for example, the determined decoration symbol, the determined special symbol, etc.), an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) Hold storage means for storing information regarding variable display of identification information which is a gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine 1 etc.) controlled to a gaming state, a probability change state, a time saving state, etc. (For example, the first special view reserve storage unit 151A, the second special view reserve storage unit 151B, the first start winning reception command buffer 194A, the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, etc.), Hold display means for performing a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the storage means (for example, a process of adding a hold display to the first start winning storage display area 5HL in the first hold addition process of step S162, step S165 Specific display corresponding to the variable display to be executed based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied and the process of adding the hold display to the second start winning storage display area 5HR in the second hold addition processing of Specific display means (for example, a special image or the like representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display), such as an active display (specific display) in which a hold display corresponding to the variable display is displayed in a predetermined active display area AHA , Variation category in the first holding effect determination process of step S160 and the second holding effect determination process of step S163 The hold display mode decision table to be used is selected from among the plurality of hold display mode decision tables based on the selected hold display mode decision table and the start based on the random number value MR6 for display mode decision of the hold display. The process of determining the display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display to be additionally displayed in the prize storage display area 5H, and the process of holding information corresponding to the hold display displayed at the time of addition display mode The specific display corresponding to the variable display executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the timing when the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA is erased or the erased specific display is actively displayed In particular, when displaying (re-displaying) in the area AHA, or when displaying the deleted specific display in the active display area AHA. The active display pattern selected in the variable display start setting process of step S171 is selected by selecting the active display pattern including the timing of displaying the fixed display and the display mode of the specific display at the time of displaying the specific display in the active display area AHA. And the like) setting the specific display to the active display area AHA, and setting the active display pattern including effects to be displayed again, and the like), and the specific display means performs the first display mode (for example, The display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the suspension display when displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second start winning storage display area 5HR, etc.) is different from the first display mode The second display mode (for example, the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the second start winning memory display area 5HR And the display mode of the specific display which is not the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the pending display when the display is performed, etc.), and the variable display to be executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition. The corresponding specific display is displayed in the first display mode, and a predetermined timing after displaying the specific display of the first display mode (for example, timing immediately after starting variable display, variable display is started The timing after a predetermined time has passed from when the decoration pattern is stopped in the reach mode or non-reach mode in the decoration pattern display area 5L, 5R, the timing before the decoration pattern is stopped, the reach mode or non reach in the decoration pattern display area 5L, 5R The timing after the decoration pattern is stopped in the mode, the timing before the chance pattern is stopped in the pseudo continuous change, the chance pattern in the pseudo continuous change The specific display is erased at the timing before stopping, etc., and the specific timing after the predetermined timing (for example, the timing after the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display after the predetermined timing, the predetermined timing The timing before the decorative pattern is stopped in the reach aspect or the non-reach aspect in the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R later than, and the reach aspect or the non reach in the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R after the predetermined timing The chance symbol is stopped in the timing before the chance symbol is stopped in the timing after the decorative symbol is stopped in a mode, the pseudo continuous variation after the predetermined timing, and the false symbol in the pseudo continuous variation after the predetermined timing After the specific display of the first display mode is redisplayed at the previous timing) When a specific display result (for example, a decorative symbol corresponding to becoming a big hit gaming state, etc.) is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display that can be changed to a specific display of a display mode and displayed. It is a game machine characterized by displaying a specific display of the 2nd display mode at a rate higher than a case where a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

  According to such a configuration, when the specific display result is derived and displayed, the gaming machine displays the specific display of the second display mode in the predetermined area at a higher rate than when the specific display result is not derived and displayed. Since it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the specific display result by the display mode of the specific display displayed in the predetermined area, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

(2) Further, according to one aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine of the above (1), a display mode of the specific display displayed in the second display mode by changing the specific display means from the first display mode. Specific display change effect execution to execute specific display change effect (for example, active display (specific display) such as active display change effect, specific display change effect, etc. to change to a notice mode) Means (for example, whether to execute the active display change presentation to the specific display corresponding to the change in the first presentation staging determination process in step S160, the second presentation staging decision process in step S163, or the presentation execution setting process in step S532 Processing to determine whether or not, processing to determine the type of active display change presentation when executing active display change presentation A process of determining an effect mode of an active display change effect when executing an active display change effect, a process of determining an execution timing of an active display change effect when performing an active display change effect, an effect based on the determination results The process of setting (or resetting) the control pattern, the erasing timing when changing the display mode of the specific display or the display mode of the specific display, the display mode of the specific display when redisplaying after erasing the specific display, or redisplaying It is a game machine characterized by further having a process of setting an active display pattern including timing etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can change the specific display displayed in the second display mode, so that the player's game can be performed even after the specific display of the second display mode is displayed. Expectations can be improved.

(3) Further, according to one aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) and (2), the specific display means has a plurality of timings (for example, reach to the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) The timing before the decoration pattern is displayed in the mode, the timing after the decoration pattern is displayed in the reach mode in the decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5R, the timing before the chance pattern is displayed in the pseudo run change, the pseudo run change The specific display of the second display mode is displayed in the predetermined area at any timing of the timing after the chance symbol is displayed in the second display mode, and the specific display of the second display mode is the predetermined area. The ratio controlled to the specific gaming state may be different according to the timing displayed on the screen.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can focus attention on the timing at which the specific display of the second display mode is displayed in the predetermined area, and can improve the player's sense of expectation.

(4) Further, according to one aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the above (2), the specific change effect executing means displays the specific display means in the second display mode in the predetermined area. The specific display change effect (for example, the active display change effect, the specific display change effect, etc.) for changing the display mode of the specific display to a third display mode different from the second display mode An effect (a main notice effect) or the like to be changed to an aspect may be executed.

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine can further change the specific display of the second display mode to the specific display of the third display mode, the specific display of the second display mode is displayed Even after that, the player's expectation can be improved.

(5) Further, according to one aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the above (2) or (4), a plurality of timings during variable display (for example, the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R are displayed in a reach manner The timing before the symbol is displayed, the timing after the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach pattern in the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5R, the timing before the chance symbol is displayed in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the chance symbol in the pseudo continuous fluctuation Specific effect (for example, the first system change effect, the second system change effect, the first system change) which indicates whether the display mode of the specific display changes at any timing among the timings after the is displayed) The specific display change effect execution means further includes a specific effect execution means for executing the effect and the second system change effect, the suggested effect, the specific effect, etc., and the specific display change effect execution means The ratio of whether or not the display mode of the specific display of the second display mode changes may be made to differ depending on which of the plurality of timings the means performs the specific effect (for example, it may be different) In the first timing (for example, the timing before reaching), it is easy to determine the display mode of the lower color such as white or blue, and in the second timing (for example, the timing after reaching) after the first timing, It may be easy to determine the display mode of upper colors such as yellow and red.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can pay attention to the execution timing of the specific effect which suggests whether or not the display mode of the specific display of the second display mode is changed, thereby improving the player's interest It can be done.

(6) Further, according to one aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (5), the hold display unit is a first hold display mode (for example, the first hold display mode). The display mode of the hold display displayed in the white display mode in the start winning storage display area 5HL, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the blue display mode in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, and the second start winning The display mode of the hold display displayed in the white display mode in the memory display area 5HR, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the blue display mode in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, etc.) or the first hold The second hold display mode different from the display mode (for example, the display mode of the hold display displayed in yellow in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the red display in the first start winning storage display area 5HL In a manner The display mode of the displayed hold display, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the second start winning storage display area 5HR in the yellow display mode, or the red display mode in the second start winning storage display area 5HR The hold display is displayed in the display mode etc. of the hold display, and the specific display unit displays the specific display of the second display mode in the predetermined area according to the display mode of the hold display displayed by the hold display unit. The ratio to be displayed may be different (for example, depending on the display mode of the hold display when displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second start winning storage display area 5HR, After being displayed in the active display area AHA as the display of the corresponding specific display and deleting the displayed specific display, the display mode of the specific display is different from the display mode before the deletion. It may be such proportion as to whether displayed in blanking the display area AHA are different).

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can focus attention on the hold display mode of the hold display before the specific display of the first display mode is displayed in the predetermined area, thus improving the player's interest It can be done.

(7) In addition, the gaming machine which is one mode of this invention, after game media passes the starting territory which is provided in game territory (for example, 1st starting winning a prize opening and 2nd starting winning a prize mouth etc), variable indication The variable display of the identification information is executed based on the establishment of the start condition which allows the start of (for example, the special view variable display, the decorative symbol variable display, the special view and the variable symbol display), and the variable display is displayed. When a specific display result is derived and displayed as a result (for example, a determined decoration symbol, a determined special symbol, etc.), it is controlled to a specific gaming state (eg, a big hit gaming state, a probability change state, a time saving state, etc.) Hold storage means for storing hold information for variable display of identification information which is a gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine 1 etc.) and gaming media has passed the start area but the start condition of variable display is not satisfied For example, Figure hold storage unit 151A, second special view hold storage unit 151B, first start winning reception command buffer 194A, second start winning reception command buffer 194B, etc.) and hold information stored in the hold storage unit Hold display means for displaying a hold display for each (for example, a process of adding a hold display to the first start winning storage display area 5HL in the first hold addition process in step S162, a second hold addition process in step S165 2) A process of adding a hold display to the start winning memory display area 5HR, etc.) and a specific display result (for example, a decorative symbol corresponding to becoming a big hit gaming state) is derived as a display result of the variable display where the start condition is satisfied. When displayed, the specific table corresponding to the variable display performed at a higher rate than when the specific display result is not derived and displayed (For example, an active display (specific display) in which a hold display corresponding to the variable display is displayed in a predetermined active display area AHA, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display, etc.) (For example, active display area AHA (active display area AHA is provided, for example, at the lower center of image display device 5, at least active display is displayed on this active display area AHA, and in addition to active display Specific display means (for example, the first holding effect determination process of step S160 and the second variation effect determination process of step S163) for displaying in a region including a predetermined range including the active display frame and the active display frame to be enclosed Among the multiple pending display mode decision tables based on Display of a hold display to be additionally displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H based on the selected hold display mode determination table and the selected display mode decision random number value MR6 for selecting the hold display mode decision table to be used Variable executed based on the start condition of the hold information corresponding to the hold display displayed in the display mode at the time of addition based on the process of determining the mode (display mode at the time of addition) or the display mode at the time of addition The hold display corresponding to the display is deleted from the start winning storage display area 5H, and whether or not the specific display corresponding to the deleted hold display is displayed in the active display area AHA, or the specific display corresponding to the deleted hold display is active In the case of displaying in the active display area AHA whether the display area AHA is to be displayed (re-displayed) or if the specific display corresponding to the deleted hold display is displayed The active display pattern selected in the variable display start setting process of step S171 is selected by selecting the active display pattern including the timing of displaying the fixed display and the display mode of the specific display at the time of displaying the specific display in the active display area AHA. Processing to set an active display pattern (including an effect of displaying a specific display in the active display area AHA) and the like).

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can display the specific display in the predetermined area at a higher rate when the specific display result is derived and displayed than when the specific display result is not derived and displayed. Since the player's sense of expectation for the specific display result can be effectively improved depending on whether the specific display is displayed in the predetermined area, the player's interest can be improved.

(8) Further, according to one aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the above (7), the specific display change effect is executed to change the display mode of the specific display displayed in the predetermined area by the specific display means. Specific display change effect execution means (for example, main display effect effect to change the active display (specific display) such as active display change effect, specific display change effect, etc. to notice mode) For example, whether or not to execute the active display change effect for the specific display corresponding to the change in the first hold effect determination process in step S160, the second hold effect determination process in step S163, or the effect execution setting process in step S532 Processing for determining the type of active display change presentation when executing the active display change presentation, A process of determining an effect mode of an active display change effect when executing a active display change effect, a process of determining an execution timing of an active display change effect when an active display change effect is performed, an effect based on these determination results The process of setting (or resetting) the control pattern, the erasing timing when changing the display mode of the specific display or the display mode of the specific display, the display mode of the specific display when redisplaying after erasing the specific display, or redisplaying It is a game machine characterized by further having a process of setting an active display pattern including timing etc.).

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine can change the display mode of the displayed specific display, the player's sense of expectation can be improved even after the specific display is displayed.

(9) Further, according to one aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to any one of the above (6) and (7), the specific display means has a plurality of timings (for example, reach to the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) The timing before the decoration pattern is displayed in the mode, the timing after the decoration pattern is displayed in the reach mode in the decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5R, the timing before the chance pattern is displayed in the pseudo run change, the pseudo run change The specific display is displayed in the predetermined area at any timing of the timing after the chance symbol is displayed in the game, and the specific display is controlled to the specific gaming state according to the timing when the specific display is displayed in the predetermined area. The rate of change may be different.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can focus attention on the timing at which the specific display is displayed in the predetermined area, and can improve the player's sense of expectation.

(10) Further, according to one aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the above (8), the specific change effect executing means changes a display mode of the specific display displayed in the predetermined area by the specific display means. The specific display change effect (for example, active display change effect, specific display change effect, etc. active display (specific display) may be changed to a notice mode (main notice effect), etc.) may be executed.

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine can change the display mode of the specific display, the player's sense of expectation can be improved even after the specific display is displayed.

(11) Further, according to one aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the above (8) or (10), a plurality of timings during variable display (for example, decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5R are displayed in a reach manner) The timing before the symbol is displayed, the timing after the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach pattern in the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5R, the timing before the chance symbol is displayed in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the chance symbol in the pseudo continuous fluctuation Specific effect (for example, the first system change effect, the second system change effect, the first system change) which indicates whether the display mode of the specific display changes at any timing among the timings after the is displayed) The system further includes a specified effect execution means for executing the effect and the second system change effect, the suggested effect, the specific effect, etc.), and the specific display change effect execution means The ratio of whether or not the display mode of the specific display changes may be made different depending on which of the plurality of timings the executing means executes the specific effect (for example, the first timing (for example, the first timing (for example, In the timing before reach, it is easy to be decided on the display mode of lower color such as white and blue, and in the second timing (for example, the timing after reach) after the first timing, the top such as yellow and red It may be easy to determine the display mode of the color of

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can focus attention on the execution timing of the specific effect which suggests whether or not the display mode of the specific display changes, and can improve the player's interest.

(12) Further, according to one aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to any one of (7) to (11) above, the hold display unit is a first hold display mode (for example, the first hold display mode). The display mode of the hold display displayed in the white display mode in the start winning storage display area 5HL, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the blue display mode in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, and the second start winning The display mode of the hold display displayed in the white display mode in the memory display area 5HR, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the blue display mode in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, etc.) or the first hold The second hold display mode different from the display mode (for example, the display mode of the hold display displayed in yellow in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the red display in the first start winning storage display area 5HL state The display mode of the hold display displayed in the display mode of the hold display displayed in the second start winning storage display area 5HR in the yellow display mode or the red display mode in the second start winning storage display area 5HR Displaying the hold display by the display mode etc. of the hold display to be performed, the specific display means displaying the specific display in the predetermined area at a different rate depending on the display mode of the hold display displayed by the hold display means (For example, depending on the display mode of the hold display when displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the corresponding specific display After being displayed in the active display area AHA as a display and erasing the displayed specific display, the active display area A is displayed in a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode before the erasing. It may be such proportion as to whether displayed in A is different).

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine can focus attention on the hold display mode of the hold display before the specific display is displayed in the predetermined area, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine by one mode of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view exemplifying a game random number counted on the main substrate side. It is a figure which illustrates a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data control area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a production control pattern, etc. It is a block diagram etc. which show the structural example of the data holding area for presentation control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the starting winning a prize judgment processing in special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of starting winning a prize. It is a flow chart etc. which show an example of random number value judging processing at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a change category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a change category determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of at the time of winning a prize production decision processing in production control process processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of the display mode at the time of the addition of a pending | holding display. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of the display mode of the specific display by the display mode determination table of specific display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio by an active display change production execution presence determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio of the production | presentation aspect at the time of active display change presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio by the presentation execution timing determination table at the time of 1st system change presentation execution. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows another example of the setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the specific display by the display mode determination table of specific display. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the other setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of a pending | holding display. It is a figure which shows the other setting example of the determination ratio by an active display change production execution presence determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio by the 1st system | strain detailed pattern determination table at the time of 1st system change production execution.

(Embodiment)
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, showing a layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. In the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  In the lower part of the game area of the game board 2, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The regular winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable winglets that changes between a normally open state in a vertical position and an enlarged open state in a tilting position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric symbol shown in FIG. A tulip type character (normal motorized character) is provided, and a start area (second start area) forms a second start winning opening.

  As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal motorized combination is off. It will be in the normally open state which is unfortunate. On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by tilting control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric combination is on. It becomes an expansion and release state which is easy to enter. In addition, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normal opening state, the gaming ball may enter more than in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening by, for example, closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second start winning opening as the second start area is the enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), and the normal open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) or can not pass (enter) Change to

  The game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. In addition, a winning by the game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A is referred to as a first starting winning. In addition, the winning due to the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B is referred to as a second starting winning.

  A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are detected based on the fact that the game balls having passed (entered) the first start winning opening are detected by the first start opening switch 22A (based on the occurrence of the first start winning) Is paid out as a prize ball, and the first special symbol game to be executed in the first special symbol display device 4A if the first special figure reservation storage number (described later) is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4") A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as (described later) or variable display (described later) of a decorative symbol executed on the image display device 5 is satisfied. In addition, a predetermined number (for example, three) of gaming balls having passed through (entered) the second start winning opening are detected by the second starting opening switch 22B (based on the occurrence of the second start winning) The second special symbol display device 4B executes the second special symbol display device if the game ball is paid out as a prize ball and the second special view reserve memory number (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a graphic game (described later) or a variable display (described later) of a decorative symbol executed on the image display device 5 is satisfied. Note that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the first start winning and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the second starting win may be the same or different from each other. Good.

  The first special view reserve memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not executed immediately when the first start winning occurs and are temporarily suspended. Even when the first start condition for executing a variable display game such as a first special view game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start winning, the first start When the first start condition for allowing the start of the above-mentioned variable display game due to the occurrence of the winning is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established earlier is under execution) In the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in the execution waiting state). That is, the number of first special view pending storages is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in the execution waiting state. Each time the first start condition is satisfied, the number of first to-be-stored storages decreases by one.

  In addition, although the 1st starting condition by a certain 1st starting prize is satisfied, the 1st starting condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 1st starting winning is not satisfied Variable indication corresponding to the 1st starting winning concerned Is stored (held) as hold data (first special-image hold information) until a first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the suspended first special-pattern suspension information is digested one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested first-special-pattern suspension information is executed.

  The second special drawing reserve memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not executed immediately when the second start winning occurs and are temporarily suspended. Even when the second start condition for executing a variable display game such as a second special view game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol (described later) is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start winning, the second start When the second start condition for allowing the start of the above-mentioned variable display game due to the occurrence of a winning is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established earlier is under execution) In the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in the execution waiting state). In other words, the second special drawing reserve storage number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the execution waiting state. The number of second special map reservations is decreased by one each time one second start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the 2nd start condition by a certain 2nd start winning is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd start winning concerned with which the 2nd start condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 2nd starting winning combination is not satisfied Is stored (held) as hold data (second special-image hold information) until a second start condition for permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held second special-image hold information is digested one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the second special-character hold information to be digested is executed.

  When the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as "starting winning opening". Further, when the first start winning combination and the second start winning combination are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as "starting winning combination". Further, the number of pending storages obtained by adding the number of first special view pending storages and the number of second special view pending storages is referred to as “total pending storage number”. In the case where the number of first special figure holding storage, the number of second special drawing holding storage, and the total number of holding storage are not distinguished from each other, it is usually simply referred to as "special drawing holding number of storage". When it is referred to as “the number of storages”, it may refer to any one or two of the number of first special view pending storages, the number of second special view pending storages, and the total number of pending storages. Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as "start conditions" or "execution conditions". Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “start conditions”. In addition, the first special view hold information and the second special view hold information are also simply referred to as "special view hold information" unless they are distinguished from each other.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the lower part of the game area of the game board 2 (below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B). The special variable winning prize ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door which is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 serving as a special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2 and a specific area which changes to an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. To form a winning opening as.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is off, the big winning mouth door closes the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball passes the big winning mouth (enter) I can not do it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is in the on state, the big winning mouth door opens the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball passes the big winning mouth (enter ) To make it easier. In this manner, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters), which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter). Do. In place of the closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter) the big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball which has passed (entered) the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. A predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as winning balls based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening that is in the open state in the special variable winning winning ball device 7, the gaming ball is in the other winning opening such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening. More balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special winning prize opening is opened in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, the gaming ball can enter into the special winning prize opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning hole is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain a winning ball by passing (entering) the gaming ball to the big winning hole, A second condition that is disadvantageous to the

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2. The first special symbol display device 4A is composed of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of 7 segments or a dot matrix. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. The first special symbol display device 4A variably displays (variable display) special symbols (also referred to as "special figures") that are plural types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 4B. In addition, the special symbol (special figure) variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as the "first special view", and the special symbol (special figure) variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B is " It is also called "second special view". Also, a game to be executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, a variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (a variable display game in which the first special view is variably displayed) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and a variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (A variable display game in which the second special view is variably displayed) is also referred to as a second special view game. Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special figure game and the 2nd special figure game, it is also only called a "special figure game".

  The first special symbol display device 4A (same as the second special symbol display device 4B) is a special figure game, and includes a plurality of types including numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. The special symbol is displayed variably. Each special symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are attached to the respective numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are attached to the symbol indicating “−”. Just do it. In addition, a special symbol is not limited to what is comprised from the number which shows "0"-"9", the symbol which shows "-", etc. FIG. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (for example, lighting patterns such as L and E of the alphabet) in which combinations of what are turned on and turned off in 7-segment LEDs are set in advance are set as special symbols. You may display it.

  A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 2 (the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) . The first hold indicator 25A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the number of first special view hold memories (the number of hold for the first special view game) based on the hold data (first special view hold information) A first pending display is made to display possible. For example, the first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first special view hold memories so as to be identifiable by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of reservations for the first special view game is increased by one due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the first special view game is suspended due to the establishment of a new first start condition When the number is reduced by one, the number of lights may be reduced by one. The second hold indicator 25B is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special view hold storage number (the number of pending for the second special view game) based on the hold data (second special view hold information) A second pending display is made to display possible. For example, the second hold indicator 25B displays the second special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner by the number of LEDs to be lit. For example, if the number of reservations for the second special view game is increased by one due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the number of lights is increased by one, and the second special view game is suspended due to the establishment of a new second start condition When the number is reduced by one, the number of lights may be reduced by one.

  On the left side of the game area in the game board 2, a pass gate 41, a normal symbol display 20, and a common drawing hold display 25C are provided. The game ball having passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by, for example, the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball which has passed the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21, if the common drawing reserve memory number (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"), the normal symbol display 20 A common drawing start condition for executing a common drawing game (described later) to be executed in is established.

  The normal symbol display 20 is constituted by LEDs of 7 segments, a dot matrix, etc., similarly to the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. The normal symbol display 20 variably displays (variable display) an ordinary symbol (also referred to as a “common figure” or “ordinary drawing”) which is plural types of identification information different from the special symbol. Note that a variable display game in which an ordinary symbol is variably displayed is also referred to as a common drawing game (or “normal drawing game”). In addition, the information regarding the common drawing game in which the common drawing start condition is satisfied but the common drawing start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as holding data (general drawing holding information).

  The common drawing hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays, for example, the common drawing hold storage number based on the held data (general drawing hold information) by the number of LEDs to be lit. The common drawing reserve memory number is the number of common drawing games whose execution is temporarily suspended without being executed immediately when the gaming ball having passed the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. Even if the standard drawing start condition for executing the standard drawing game is satisfied by the detection of the gaming ball by the gate switch 21, the common drawing start condition for permitting the start of the common drawing game is not satisfied ( For example, when the spread game established earlier is in execution), the execution of the spread game is suspended (the spread game is in a state of waiting for execution). That is, the common drawing reserve memory number is the number of games of the common drawing game which is in the state of waiting for execution. The common drawing reserve storage number decreases by one each time one common drawing start condition is satisfied.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is configured of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol display area is arranged. In the decorative symbol display area, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) capable of identifying each, are variably displayed. Variable display of decoration identification information (decorative design) is also included in the variable display game. The image display device 5 is a first special figure game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (a special figure game using the first special figure) or a second special figure executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the game (special drawing game using the second special drawing), variable display of a plurality of kinds of decorative designs is executed in the display area (decorative display area).

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 1, in the display area of the image display device 5, decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" are arranged. In response to the start of any one of the first special view game or the second special view game, ie, corresponding to the start of fluctuation of any of the first special view or the second special view Then, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, fluctuation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started. After that, in response to the end of the special figure game, that is, in response to the stop display of the special figure, in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, a decorative symbol (finalized decorative symbol, final The stop symbol (also referred to as a stop symbol) is displayed in a stop state. That is, in the display area of the image display device 5 (the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R), the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with (correspondence to) the first special drawing game (or the second special drawing game). The finalized decorative symbol (also referred to as a final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  The decorative design may be, for example, eight kinds of design (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese numerals, English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images. The character image may be, for example, a person or animal, an object other than these, or a decorative image showing a symbol such as a character or any other arbitrary figure). Each decorative symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each. As an example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” may be attached to each alphanumeric character indicating “1” to “8”. The decorative design is not limited to eight types, but may be any number (for example, seven types, nine types, etc.) as long as it can constitute an appropriate number of combinations such as a big hit combination or a combination resulting in lost.

  In addition, the fixed display which is the stop display of the finalized special symbol which is the fixed display which is the variable display result of special symbol (also referred to as the special display display result) and which ends the variable display, the fixed display which is the variable display result of the decorative symbol Stop display to stop the variable display and to display the fixed display which stops the variable display by stopping display of the fixed normal pattern which is the variable display result of the normal design (also referred to as common drawing display result) Also referred to as a complete stop indication, a final stop indication, or a derived indication (or simply "derived"). In addition, the fluctuation start timing and the fluctuation end timing of the decorative symbol may not necessarily coincide with the fluctuation start timing and the fluctuation end timing of the special symbol, and within the fluctuation time of the special symbol (special pattern fluctuation time), the decorative symbol The fluctuation time should be settled.

  That is, the variation start timing of the decorative symbol may be later than the variation start timing of the special symbol, or the variation end timing of the special symbol (stop display timing of the determined special symbol) is the variation end timing of the decorative symbol (of the determined ornament symbol It may be later than the stop display timing). For example, the execution of the predetermined effect may be started after the display of the finalized decorative symbol is stopped, and the finalized special symbol may be stopped when the predetermined effect is finished. An example of the predetermined effect is a simple hold effect (described later) which is an aspect of the hold effect (described later).

  Moreover, you may perform stop display different from complete stop display (final stop display, derivation | leading-out display). For example, the decorative symbol may be temporarily stopped during the variable display from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when the finalized decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In the temporary stop display, the decorative symbol whose fluctuation speed has become "0", for example, is displayed while causing slight shaking, expansion and contraction, etc., or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, one second) It includes things that are stopped and displayed without causing time, slight shaking or stretching.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 5, a first start winning storage display area 5HL and a second start winning storage display area 5HR are arranged. In the first start winning combination storage display area 5HL, as in the first suspension display 25A, a first suspension display is performed to display the first special map suspension storage number in an identifiable manner. That is, the number of first special drawing games currently suspended for execution is displayed in an identifiable manner. In the first start winning storage display area 5HL, as in the second storage display 25B, a second storage display is performed to display the second special map storage number in a specifiable manner. That is, the number of second special drawing games currently suspended for execution is displayed in an identifiable manner.

  In the first start winning combination storage display area 5HL, for example, the first hold display may be performed right-justified. That is, when the number of reservations for the first special view game is increased due to the establishment of the new first start condition, if there is no other first suspension display in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the first starting winning storage display A new first hold display is added on the right side of area 5HL (center side of the display area of image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the first special view hold information for the increased amount, and the first start prize storage display area 5HL If there is another first pending display in the above, the new first pending on the left side of the other first pending display (more than the other left first pending display if there are multiple other first pending displays) A display may be added. In addition, when there are a plurality of first suspension displays in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, when the number of suspension of the first special view game decreases due to the establishment of a new first start condition, the first reduction The first hold display (the first hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the rightmost side of the first start winning storage display area 5HL corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special view hold information is erased, Each of the other first pending displays is shifted (shifted) to the erased first pending display side (right side).

  Further, in the second start winning combination storage display area 5HR, for example, the second hold display may be performed left-justified. That is, when the number of reservations for the second special view game increases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, if there is no other second suspension display in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the second starting winning storage display A new second hold display is added on the left side of area 5HR (center side of the display area of image display device 5) as a hold display corresponding to the increased second special view hold information, and second start winning storage display area 5HR If there is another second pending display in the above, the new second pending on the right side of the other second pending display (more than the other right second pending display if there are multiple other second pending displays) A display may be added.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of second hold display in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, when the number of holdings of the second special view game decreases due to the establishment of a new second start condition, the second of the decrease amount The second hold display (the second hold display displayed from the oldest) displayed on the leftmost side of the second start winning storage display area 5HR corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the special view hold information is erased, Each of the other second hold display is moved (shifted) to the erased second hold display side (left side). When the first start winning storage display area 5HL and the second start winning storage display area 5HR are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as "start winning storage display area 5H".

  In addition to the first start winning storage display area 5HL and the second starting winning storage display area 5HR, the first start winning storage display area 5HL and the second displaying area in the display area of the image display device 5 may be used as a reserve display area. It is a reserve display that is deleted (moved) from start winning a prize storage display area 5HR and satisfies the predetermined condition and is also satisfied by the first special view reserve information that is digested by the establishment of the first start condition, and by the establishment of the second start condition. Display a special image representing information including active display (also referred to as display at digest time, display at this time, etc.) according to the hold display corresponding to the variable display of the decorative symbol executed based on the second special view hold information to be digested Possible active display area AHA (digestion display area, digestion display area, present hold display area, present hold display area, active hold display area, active hold display area A) active display area, current display area, current display area, display area at the time of digestion, etc.), for example, between the first start winning storage display area 5HL and the second start winning storage display area 5HR ing.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the active display area AHA is disposed between the first start winning storage display area 5HL and the second starting winning storage display area 5HR. The display area AHA may be disposed at any position of the display area of the image display device 5. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the active display, an active display frame surrounding the active display, an active display or an active display such as characters or images displayed around the active display or around the active display frame. The information corresponding to is displayed by the special image. In the case where the special display displayed in the active display and the active display area AHA is not particularly distinguished, it is also simply referred to as “specific display”. That is, when simply referred to as “specific display”, it is intended to represent either or both of the active display and the special image displayed in the active display area AHA, or a special image including the active display.

  In the present embodiment, when the first hold display or the second hold display is not displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the image display device 5 displays the decorative symbol When the variable display is not performed, the first hold display or the second hold display by the first start winning or second start winning is once performed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second start winning storage display area 5HR. After being displayed on the first hold display or the second hold display based on the start of the variable display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display, the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second start winning The specific display corresponding to the deleted first hold display or the second hold display is displayed on the active display area AHA.

  In addition, when the first hold display or the second hold display is not displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the image display device 5 is When not being performed, the first hold display or the second hold display corresponding to the first hold information or the second hold information by the first start winning or the second start winning is the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second [2] Based on starting variable display corresponding to the first hold information or the second hold information without being displayed in the start winning storage display area 5HR, identification corresponding to the first hold information or the second hold information The display may be displayed in the active display area AHA.

  In the game area of the game board 2, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill and a large number of obstacle nails that change the flow direction and speed of the game ball are provided. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings can be provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. It may be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as winning balls based on the fact that the game balls entering any of the general winning openings are detected by the predetermined general winning ball switch. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the lower right portion of the gaming machine frame 3 is provided a striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to fire a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area. For example, the hit ball operating handle adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball according to the amount of operation (the amount of rotation) by the player or the like. The hitting control handle may be provided with a single-shot release switch for stopping the drive of the firing motor provided in the hit shooting device or a touch ring (touch sensor).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball and a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device (stored ) Is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower tray is provided which holds (retains) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A which can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower tray, for example, at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operating rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operating rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operating hand is hit when the player holds the operating rod). There is. The trigger button can perform a predetermined instruction operation by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operation finger (for example, index finger or the like) while the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with the operation hand (for example, left hand or the like) It should just be comprised. Inside the operating rod, a trigger sensor may be incorporated so as to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button.

  A tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower tray at the lower part of the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit may be two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) disposed parallel to the board of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod as viewed from the player facing the pachinko game machine 1 Four transmission types combining the pair) and two transmission type photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged vertically to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation stick viewed from the player's side It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

  The member forming the upper tray is, for example, a push button 31B which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). It is provided. The push button 31B may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by the player or the like. A push sensor may be provided inside the main body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 31B or the like, for detecting a player's operation performed on the push button 31B.

  An audio output member is provided in the periphery of the game area of the game machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speakers 8UL and 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speakers 8LL and 8LR are installed at the lower left and right lower portions of the upper plate (the lower left and right oblique upper portions). It has been installed. Hereinafter, when the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR are not particularly distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as the speaker 8. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs a rendering sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 and outputs a warning sound according to the situation of the gaming machine 1.

  The effect sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound and the like. The music in the effect sound is, for example, BGM, a song or the like which is output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice (serif, a message) or the like which is output according to a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of winning on the first start winning opening etc). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, a voice, or the like that is output in response to an operation act on the push button 31B. In addition, since the operation act on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound outputted in response to the operation act on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the presentation sound is, for example, a sound to notify of requesting an operation action to the push button 31B, a voice, a sound to notify transition to the reach state at the time of transition of the reach state (described later), a voice or These are sounds, voices, and the like for giving notice or suggestion to shift to the big hit gaming state before shifting to the big hit gaming state.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound output when the glass door (not shown) is opened, etc. .

  A light emitting member (light emitter) that emits light as effect or decoration is provided on the inside and the periphery of the game area of the game machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed at the upper position of the image display device 5, the light emitting member 9CL and the light emitting member 9CR are installed at the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting members are installed at the upper position of the gaming machine frame 3. A light emitting member 9SL and a light emitting member 9SR are installed at the left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 9U. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are collectively referred to as a lamp 9 unless otherwise specified. The lamp 9 may be configured of, for example, one or more LEDs, or may be configured of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotary lamp (for example, a lamp lamp) having a rotary unit. In addition to the above, for example, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the special variable winning prize ball device 7 etc.) in the game area.

  Although the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9 and the like described above are effect devices that execute effects, the game machine 1 may be provided with other effect devices such as effect models having a drive unit as effect devices. Good.

  In addition, the arrangement position (installation position) of each structure is an example, Comprising: You may be arrange | positioned in another position. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol indicator 20 may be provided on the same side (right side or left side) of the game area. Also, for example, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the common view hold indicator 25C may be provided on the same side (right side portion or left side portion) of the game area.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the fact that the normal drawing start condition is satisfied after the normal drawing start condition is satisfied, the normal drawing game by the normal symbol display device 20 is started. In the regular game, after starting the variable display of the normal symbol (after starting the variation of the normal symbol), when the predetermined time which becomes the common drawing variation time passes, the determined normal symbol which becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol Stop display (derivative display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per common figure) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per common figure". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed symbol, for example, a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", the variable display result of the normal symbol is "general symbol lost" Become. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per common drawing", the enlargement and release control (tilting control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip forming the variable winning prize ball device 6B is tilted is performed The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the establishment of the first start condition after the establishment of the first start condition, the special figure game (first special view game) by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. A special drawing game (second special drawing game) by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the establishment of the second starting condition after the starting condition is established. In the special figure game, after the start of the variable display of the special symbol (after the start of the variation of the special symbol), when the variable display time as the special figure fluctuation time passes, the finalized variable result of the special symbol is determined Derivate and display the symbol (special drawing display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as the determined special symbol, it becomes "big hit" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes "small hit" as a predetermined display result. In addition, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is displayed as a final symbol as a final symbol, it will be a "loss".

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as "round game") is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special view game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to a small hit gaming state as a special gaming state different from the big hit gaming state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an example, special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5” and “7” are used as a big hit symbol, and a special symbol showing the number “2” is used as a small hit symbol, The special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as big hit symbol, small hit symbol and lost symbol in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The symbol may be a symbol, or the special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol.

  After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a finalized special symbol in the special figure game and becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, in the big hit gaming state, the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7, predetermined upper limit time The big winning opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round is performed in which the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is put into the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

  The special winning opening door with the big winning opening opened during execution of the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then the special winning opening is closed, thereby the special variable winning winning ball device 7 is changed to a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is ended. The round, which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15” or the like). In addition, even before the number of times of execution of the round reaches the upper limit number of times, execution of the round may be ended by establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball did not win a prize winning opening etc.) .

  Among the rounds in the jackpot gaming state, the round in which the upper limit time for making the special variable winning prize ball device 7 the first state (open state) advantageous to the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally open It is also called a round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time for making the special variable winning prize ball device 7 in the first state (open state) is a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 second) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols showing the numbers of "3", "5" and "7" that will be the big hit symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers of "3" and "7" are normally open round big hit symbols, and the numbers of "5" The special symbol indicating is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (usually open big hit state) as a normal opening round specific gaming state controlled after a normal opening round big hit symbol is derived as a finalized special symbol in a special figure game, a special winning prize ball device of the special variable winning prize ball device 7 The big winning opening is opened in a period until the door passes a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period, or until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winning balls are generated. By doing this, a round is performed to change the special variable winning prize ball device 7 to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. In addition, a normally open big hit state is also referred to as a first specified gaming state.

  In the jackpot gaming state (short-term opening jackpot state) as a short-term opening round specific gaming state controlled after the short-term opening round big hit symbol is derived as a finalized special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round The second period (for example, 0) in which the upper limit time for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the upper limit of the period when the large winning opening is opened by the large winning opening door) is shorter than the first period in the normal opening big hit state For one second). In the short-term open big hit state, the open period of the big winning opening may be controlled to be the second period, and the other control may be performed in the same manner as the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-term open big hit state, the number of rounds to be executed may be the second round number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first round number (for example, “15”) in the normal open big hit state.

  In such a short-term open jackpot state, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball is won in the large winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (eg, 0.1 second), which is very short. Therefore, the short-term open jackpot state is a jackpot gaming state in which the balls (prize balls) can not be obtained substantially. In addition, the short-term opening big hit state is also referred to as a second specified gaming state.

  Also, the big hit gaming state as the short opening round specified gaming state is not limited to the one having a short opening time of the big winning opening compared to the big hit gaming state as the normal opening round specified playing state, for example, opening the big winning opening While the period (upper limit time) is the same for the short opening round specified gaming state and the normal opening round specified playing state, the upper limit number of times (for example, 2 times) that makes the big winning opening open in the short opening round specified playing state is The number may be smaller than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal opening round specific gaming state. That is, in the big hit gaming state as the short opening round specified gaming state, the period for changing the big winning opening to the first state in which the gaming ball easily passes (enters) in each round is the first period in the normal opening round specified gaming state Also, the second period may be at least one of the short second period and the second round number in which the number of round executions is smaller than the first round number in the special release round specific gaming state. .

  After the special symbol indicating the small hit symbol "2" is derived as the determined special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit gaming state as the special gaming state is controlled. In this small hit gaming state, similarly to the short-term open big hit state, a variable winning operation is performed to change the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 to a first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, an operation of setting the special variable winning prize ball device 7 in the first state (open state) for the second period is repeatedly executed.

  In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R arranged in the display area of the image display 5, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B In response to the start of any special drawing game among the games, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is variable during a period from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when variable display is ended by stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be in the predetermined reach state which constitutes a part of the combination of a display.

  With the reach state, a decorative symbol (also referred to as a "reach variation symbol") that is not displayed in a stopped state when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of a big hit combination Is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or some of the decorative symbols are fluctuated synchronously while constituting all or a part of the big hit combination. In the following description, reaching the reach state is also referred to as reaching.

  Further, in response to the reaching state, the variation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative symbol is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or, by changing the display mode of the background image, reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the fluctuation mode of the decorative pattern, a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state is executed. May be A rendering operation such as display of a character image or change in display mode of a background image, reproduction display of a moving image, or change in change mode of a decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8 and the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9 etc. An operation mode different from the operation mode may be included.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the rendering pattern, the possibility that the big hit combination and the like will be finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect may be made different (also referred to as “big hit expectation” or “big hit reliability”). As a result, it is possible to make the jackpot expectation different depending on which one of the plurality of reach effects is performed, that is, depending on which reach effect is to appear. As an example, in the present embodiment, the reach mode of the normal reach and the reach mode of the super reach having a high jackpot expectation degree higher than the normal reach are set (prepared) in advance.

  In addition, the jackpot expectation degree is, for example, (probability that the effect is executed at the time of big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) / {(probability that the effect is executed at the time of big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) + (big hit It is calculated by the probability that the effect is executed other than time) × (probability of not being a big hit)} (when the big hit expectation is “1”, the variable display result is always a “big hit”).

  In addition, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, as one aspect of the variable display effect, it is possible to execute a slip effect, a pseudo continuous effect, or the like which is realized by a variable display operation such as the decorative symbol. In the slip effect, a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) are made after the decorative symbol is changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The temporary stop display of the decorative symbol is performed, and then a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of decorative symbol display areas (for example, "left") is displayed among the decorative symbol display areas displayed temporarily. By displaying the stop pattern after changing the decorative pattern again in either or both of the decorative symbol display area 5R of 5L and "right", effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed. Thus, in the slip effect, a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed for a predetermined number of decorative symbols after variable display of the decorative symbols is started until the finalized decorative symbols as variable display results are derived and displayed. There are times when the variable display state of the decorative symbol changes to the reach state by executing the display again, and when the decorative symbol that constitutes the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state.

  In the pseudo-series effect, in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special drawing game being met once, the fixed display that becomes the variable display result after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started Until all the symbols are derived and displayed, all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are decorative symbols (for example, a predetermined pseudo chance sequence etc. is displayed and any one of the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R is displayed) Or temporarily displayed on all, and then, again, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, re-variable display which is effect display to start variable display of all decorative symbols is predetermined. It can be done once (eg up to 4 times).

  In the present embodiment, the number of times of re-variable display (re-variable display frequency) in the pseudo-series effect is variable display until all the decorative patterns in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R are temporarily stopped (initial variable The number of times of display) (one time), the number of times of re-variable display (final variable display) after all the decoration patterns have been temporarily stopped last (1 time), and re-change between the first variable display and the last variable display The number of times of display X (X is 0 or 1 or more) is grasped as the number of times (X + 1) smaller by one time than the number of times (X + 2) of adding up. Further, the number of times of re-variable display is the same as the number (temporary stop number) at which all decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The first variable display to the first temporary stop display is also referred to as the first pseudo link, and the second variable display (the first re-variable display) to the second temporary stop display is also referred to as the second pseudo link, The third variable display (the second revariable display) to the third temporary stop display is also referred to as the third pseudo run, and the fourth variable display (the third revariable display) to the fourth temporary stop display It is also referred to as the fourth pseudo run. Further, the number of pseudo runs in the pseudo run effect is also referred to as a pseudo run fluctuation number (or a pseudo run number). That is, the number of times of pseudo continuous change, the number of times of re-variable display, and the number of times of temporary stop are the same. The increase in the number of times of the pseudo run will be also referred to as “the pseudo run continues” in the first, second, third,.

  In the variable display effect of "pseudo ream", re-variable display (re-variation) is performed 1 to 4 times, and based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once, the decorative symbol is variable It can appear as if the display started two to five times in a row.

  In addition, as for simulated series production, before reaching reach in the particular fluctuation (before reaching reach state), the simulated series chance eye mark temporary stop indication in any part or all of decorative design display area 5L, 5C and 5R As shown, the decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R may be temporarily stopped temporarily, or after reaching is reached, in any part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R The decorative symbols in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R may be temporarily stopped so as to temporarily display the pseudo connected chance eyes. In other words, the effect mode of the temporary stop display in the pseudo continuous effect includes at least the effect mode in which the temporary stop display is performed before reaching the reach state, and the effect mode in which the chance symbol is displayed temporarily stop after the reach state. May be

  The slip effect (as well as the pseudo effect) is a notice or suggestion to the player that there is a possibility that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed, or that the big hit expectation is high. May be Hereinafter, a presentation for giving notice or suggesting to a player that there is a possibility that any reach presentation or a certain reach presentation may be executed, or a high hit probability may be generically referred to as a notice presentation. The advance notice may include a variable display operation different from the slip effect and the pseudo effect, in addition to the slip effect and the pseudo effect, for example, the display of the background image and the display of the message window. Some may use a rendering operation different from the variable display production, such as hold display, audio output, light emission (lighting, blinking, extinguishing), and the like.

  In the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the specific display according to the pending display corresponding to the change as the advance notice effect, the specific display change effect to be executed in any of the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes. Or, a specific display change garbled effect or the like that is executed in any of the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes when the display mode of the specific display is not changed.

  In addition, the advance notice effect may include a suggestion effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific effect effect) that suggests (speaks) that the display mode of the specific display changes due to the specific display change effect. In addition, the suggested effect (specific effect) may be an effect performed in the same effect mode when the display mode of the specific display changes and when the display mode of the specific display does not change, or in the specific display The presentation may be performed in different presentation modes when the display mode changes and when the display mode of the specific display does not change. In addition, the suggested effect (specific effect) may be an effect that is performed either when the display mode of the specific display changes or when the display mode of the specific display does not change.

In addition, common announcement performed commonly when changing the display mode of the specific display according to the pending display corresponding to the said change, and not changing the display mode of the specific display is contained in advance production in common. It is also good. Further, the advance notice may include a success effect that changes the display mode of the specific display after the common effect is performed, and a failure effect that does not change the display mode of the specific display after the common effect is performed.
Note that the preliminary presentation effect may include a suggested production that suggests a common effect. Further, the suggested effect may be an effect that is commonly performed when the display mode of the specific display is changed and when the display mode of the specific display is not changed, as in the common effect. In other words, the suggestion effect indicates that the common effect is to be performed, or indicates that either the successful effect or the failure effect is to be performed (common effect or different from the common effect And the like) may be included.

  It should be noted that the advance notice effect may be executed (started) before the player can determine (actually confirm) whether the contents of the advance notice or the notice suggested by the advance notice effect are realized (actually confirmed). For example, the notice effect that indicates to the player that there is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative symbol by the winning of a certain game ball may reach the reaching state is at least the variable display state of the decorative symbol by the winning of the game ball It may be something which is executed (started) before reaching the reach state (or non reach state). In addition, the notice effect for notifying the player that there is a possibility that the variable display result by the winning of a certain game ball will be a "big hit" is that at least the finalized decoration symbol by the winning of the game ball is stopped and displayed. Also may be executed (started) before.

  In the advance notice effect in the present embodiment, when the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the pending display corresponding to the change is changed, the specific display is displayed on the active display area AHA, and the specific display is erased at a predetermined timing. At a specific timing after the predetermined timing, the variation such as an effect (also referred to as an erasure redisplay effect upon change) that displays the specific display in a display mode different from the display mode of the specific display before erasing at the predetermined timing An action effect is provided to indicate whether it will be or not.

  Further, in the advance notice effect in the present embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the change and the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display, establishment of the first start condition or the second start condition The hold display corresponding to the first special view hold information or the second special view hold information displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H which is digested by the establishment of the start condition is deleted from the start winning memory display area 5H, and the active display area An action presentation is prepared which indicates whether the variation such as a presentation for displaying a specific display on the AHA (also referred to as a display presentation upon change) or the like is a big hit.

  Among the advance notice effects, it is sufficient that what is to be the advance read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-decision notice effect”) is included. Prior read advance notice effect determines whether the variable display result is "big hit" based on the hold information etc. of the special drawing game before starting the variable display to be the advance notice target. (Pre-reading), it is the announcement production which is executed on the basis of the decision result. In the following description, the pending information targeted for the pre-reading advance notice effect is referred to as pending information of the target, the first pending display corresponding to the pending information of the target is referred to as first pending display of the target, and the pending information of the target is supported. The second hold display to be performed is referred to as the second hold display for the target, and the variable display corresponding to the hold information on the target is also referred to as the variable display for the target. In addition, the preread advance notice effect is executed during the digestion of the pending information of the target (when executed during the digesting process of the pending information of the target including variable display of the target) and before the pending information of the target There are a case where it is performed while digesting the hold information, and a case where it is performed while digesting the hold information of the target and during the digest of the hold information before the hold information of the target.

  After the winning of the game ball (after the establishment of the start condition), the player performs whether or not the content for giving notice of the advance notice effect of the prefetch notice is realized. It is sufficient if it is executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, the rendering operation serving as a pre-reading advance notice effect for informing the player in advance that there is a possibility of reaching the reach state due to the winning of a certain gaming ball is at least the decorative symbol by the winning of the gaming ball The variable display state may be performed (started) before reaching the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, at least for the rendering operation of the gaming ball, there is a pre-reading advance notice effect for informing the player in advance that there is a possibility that the variable display result may be a "big hit" by the winning of a certain gaming ball The finalized decorative design by winning may be performed (started) before it is stopped and displayed.

  The prefetch advance notice effect (predetermination notice effect) according to the present embodiment is, for example, a display mode when the first hold display is added in the first start winning storage display area 5HL as a display mode of a normal first hold display (normal display mode The display mode (normal display mode) of the first change effect to change the display mode to the display mode different from the normal display mode, and the display mode of the second hold display in the second start winning storage display area 5HR From the normal display mode to a display mode different from the normal display mode.

  In addition, for the advance notice notice effect (pre-judgment notice effect), for example, the hold change effect for changing the display mode of the first hold display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the first start winning memory display area 5HL An action effect such as a hold change change effect that does not change the display mode of the first hold display may be prepared. In addition, for the advance notice notice effect (predetermination notice effect), for example, a hold change effect for changing the display mode of the second hold display in the second start winning memory display area 5HR, or in the second start prize memory display area 5HR An action effect such as a hold change change effect that does not change the display mode of the second hold display may be prepared.

  When a special symbol to be a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a determined special symbol in the special drawing game, after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the variable display of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state In some cases, the finalized decoration pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of a decorative symbol is referred to as a "non-reach" (also referred to as a "normal loss") variable display mode when the variable display result is "loss".

  When the special symbol to be the lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a final symbol in the special figure game, the variable symbol state of the decorative symbol is reached after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Depending on the situation, after the reach effect is performed, the finalized decoration pattern to be a predetermined reach loss combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of a decorative symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of "reach" (also referred to as "reach loss") when the variable display result is "loss".

  Among the special symbols that are normally open round big hit symbols as special symbols determined in special drawing games, when the normal big hit symbols such as the special symbols showing the number “3” are stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is In response to the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is performed, etc., a determined decoration that becomes a predetermined normal big hit combination (also referred to as "non-probable variation big hit combination") among a plurality of types of big hit combinations The symbol is displayed stopped. The predetermined normal big hit combination is, for example, the same kind of normal symbol (also referred to as "non-probable symbol") on a predetermined effective line (for example, a straight line horizontally) formed by the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R It is a combination to display the final stop. An example of a normal symbol is an even-numbered symbol number "2", "4", "6", "8" among four kinds of decorative symbols "1" to "8". It is.

  In response to the finalized special symbol in the special figure game usually becoming a big hit symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol of the big hit combination is usually stopped is displayed after the predetermined reach effect is executed, etc. A variable display mode (also referred to as a "big hit type") of "non-probability change" (also referred to as a "usually big hit") when the variable display result is a "big hit" is referred to. Based on the variable display result becoming "big hit" in the big hit type of "non-deterministic change", it is controlled to the normally open big hit state, and after that, time shortening control (time saving control) is performed.

  By performing the time saving control, the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. The normal state is a normal gaming state different from a specific gaming state such as a big hit gaming state, and the initialization state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, initialization processing after power on as in the case of system reset) Control) is performed. In the time-saving control, one of the conditions is met first between the special figure game being executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the variable display result becoming a "big hit". When it is done, you should finish.

  Among the special symbols that are normally open round big hit symbols as special symbols determined in the special drawing game, when the probability variation big hit symbols such as the special symbols indicating the number “7” are stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is In response to reaching the reach state, a predetermined probability variation big hit combination among a plurality of types of big hit combinations after the same reach effect as when the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "normal" is executed, etc. The finalized decorative design may be stopped and displayed. In other words, in the special figure game, when the probability variation big hit symbol is displayed in the final stop, the decoration symbol in the predetermined probability variation big hit combination is finally stopped, and the decoration symbol in the predetermined regular big hit combination is stopped display There are cases where The predetermined probability variation jackpot combination is, for example, a combination in which the same kind of probability variation symbols are aligned on the effective line and the final stop is displayed. An example of the odd variation design is an ornament pattern having an odd number “1”, “3”, “5” and “7” among eight kinds of symbol designs “1” to “8”. It is.

Regardless of whether the finalized decoration design is usually a big hit combination or a positive variation big hit combination, the variable display mode in which the positive variation big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the variable display result is "big hit" It is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a “big hit type”) of “probability change” in a case. Based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit" in the big hit type of "probable change", it is controlled to a normally open big hit state, and after that, time variation control and probability change control (probable change control) are performed. By performing the probability change control, the probability that the variable display result (special view display result) becomes a "big hit" in the special view game of each time is improved to be higher than that in the normal state. The probability change control may be ended when the condition that the variable display result becomes "big hit" after the end of the big hit gaming state and the big hit gaming state is controlled again is satisfied.
As in the case of the time saving control, the probability change control may be ended when the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, even if the probability change control is ended when it is determined that the probability change control is to be ended in the probability change fall lottery executed each time the special figure game is started after the end of the big hit gaming state, even if the probability change control is ended. Good.

  When time saving control is performed, control to shorten the variation time (normal figure variation time) of the regular symbol in the regular figure game by the regular symbol display 20 than in the normal state, or the variation of the regular symbol in each regular figure game Control to improve the probability that the display result will be "per common view" than in the normal state, and tilt control of movable wing in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being "per common view" The game ball is likely to pass through (enter) the second start winning opening, such as control to make the tilt control time to perform longer than in the normal state, and control to increase the number of tilts more than in the normal state. A control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is established. As described above, the control that facilitates the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening with the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as high open control. As high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

  By performing the high open control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the wide open state is increased more than when the high open control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is likely to be satisfied, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the next variable display result The time until the "big hit" is reduced. The period during which the high release control can be performed is also referred to as a high release control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both time saving control and high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state. Further, the gaming state in which the probability change control is performed is also referred to as a probability change state or a high probability state. The gaming state in which time-saving control or high opening control is performed along with the probability variation control is also referred to as high-probability high-base state. A probability change state in which only the probability change control is performed and time reduction control or high open control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which time saving control and high open control are performed together with probability variation control may be referred to as a "probability state", and in order to be distinguished from high probability low base status, it may also be referred to as a time reduction probability variation state. On the other hand, in order to distinguish from the high probability high base state, the positive variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and short time control or high open control is not performed may be referred to as time short non definite variable state. The short time state in which time saving control or high open control is performed without performing the probability change control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability change control nor the time saving control nor the high open control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of time saving control and probability variation control is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the special figure game (second special figure game) can be executed frequently, and each special figure game (first special game (first special game) The probability that the variable display result in the figure game and the second special figure game is "big hit" is enhanced, which is advantageous for the player. A game state advantageous to a player different from the big hit game state is also referred to as a special game state.

  When the short-term open round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol indicating the number “5” as a finalized special symbol in a special drawing game, and the small hitting symbol such as a special symbol indicating a number “2” is stopped and displayed. In some cases, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, and any one of combinations of a plurality of fixed decorative symbols predetermined as an opening chance may be stopped and displayed. Further, when the short-term opening round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a finalized special symbol in the special figure game, a predetermined reach effect is executed corresponding to the change display state of the decorative symbol being in the reach state. After, for example, the finalized decoration pattern to be a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed.

  The variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various finalized decorative symbols are stopped and displayed corresponding to the finalized special symbol in the special figure game becoming the short-term opening round big hit symbol is when the variable display result is "big hit" It is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a "big hit type") of a "probable" (also referred to as a "probable big hit" or "a sudden big change big hit"). Based on the variable display result becoming "big hit" in the "big hit" of "probable", it is controlled to a short-term open big hit state, and after that end, it is sufficient to perform probability change control together with time saving control.

  The small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number "2" is stopped and displayed as a final symbol in the special drawing game, and the variable display result is controlled to the small hit gaming state based on the "small hit". After the end, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled before the variable display result is "small hit". However, when the special view game in which the variable display result is "small hit" is executed, if the number of times the special view game has been executed in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number, after the small hit gaming state ends, The special gaming state may end and be in the normal state.

  During the variable display of the decorative symbol that the finalized decorative symbol becomes the non-probable variation big hit combination or the positive variation big hit combination, the re-lottery effect may be executed. For example, as a re-lottery effect, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, after temporarily displaying a decorative symbol that is usually a big hit combination, it is changed again with the same decorative symbol aligned, One of the decorative symbol (probable variation symbol) and the decorative symbol (normal symbol) which is usually a big hit combination may be displayed as the finalized decorative symbol at the final stop.

  Usually, after the determined decoration symbol that is a big hit combination is derived and displayed, during the execution of the round at the start of the big hit gaming state or the big hit gaming state, the next round starts after any round is finished in the big hit gaming state During the period until the final round in the big hit gaming state, the period until the next variable display game is started, etc., the jackpot becoming a definite change notification effect of whether to control to a definite change state or not A promotion effect may be performed. Note that the same notification effect as the jackpot promotion promotion may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state or the like. The jackpot promotion promotion that is executed after the final round in the jackpot gaming state may be referred to in particular as "ending promotion promotion".

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13 and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Besides, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate and the like are arranged on the back of the gaming board 2 etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main substrate 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control substrate consisting of a setting function of random numbers used in the special view game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch disposed at a predetermined position, etc. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the first special figure or the second special figure The variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20, etc. It also has a function to control.

  The main circuit board 11 includes, for example, a microcomputer 100 for game control, a switch circuit 110 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls, and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 100 for game control, and the microcomputer 100 for game control A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display 5, the speaker 8 and the lamp. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for presentation such as 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 is an electric component for effect such as all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5 or all or part of the sound output operation from the speaker 8 or all or part of the lighting / extinguishing operation in the lamp 9 It has a function of determining the control content for executing a predetermined rendering operation.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12 and is for outputting sound from the speaker 8 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12 and the like. The processing circuit etc. which perform audio signal processing are mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on the command and control data from the effect control board 12, the light on / off drive in the lamp 9 etc. The lamp driver circuit etc. to be carried are mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is connected to a wire for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first start opening switch 22A, the second start opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have any configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as one called a sensor. If it is In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start opening switch 22A, the second start opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23, the game machine 1 is similarly connected to the main board 11 (for example, a glass door (not shown)). A switch for detecting the open / close state of the game board 2), a switch for detecting the open / close state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting illegal vibration, and a switch for detecting illegal electromagnetic wave. In addition, the main substrate 11 has a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold indicator 25A, a second hold indicator 25B, and a common view hold indicator 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 is relayed by the relay substrate 15. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 via the relay substrate 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and another command form may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, the command 8001H is a first change start command for specifying the start of change in the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second change start command for specifying the start of change in the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R in correspondence to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. Here, XXH represents an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set in accordance with the content of an instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, as shown in FIG. 3B, for example, different EXT data depending on the determination result of whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit” or the big hit type determination result. Is set.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination command for designating the final stop symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with, for example, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating the display of the effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in the open state in the large hitting gaming state or the small hitting gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after a large winning opening opening that notifies that the large winning opening has changed from an open state to a closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command which designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-decision result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-decision result and the jackpot type decision result and the EXT data to be set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the special winning opening open notification command and the special winning opening after open notification command, different EXT data, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed (for example, “1” to “15”) in the normal open big hit state or short open open big hit state Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, and the first special winning is generated. This is a first starting opening winning combination designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the first special drawing game by the symbol display device 4A is satisfied.

  Command B 200 H is based on the fact that the game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6 B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22 B, and the second starting winning is generated. It is a 2nd starting opening winning a prize specified command which notifies that the 2nd starting condition for performing the 2nd special figure game by special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure storage number in order to display the first special figure storage number in an identifiable manner in the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the like. . The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special view pending storage number in order to display the special view pending storage number in an identifiable manner in the second start winning storage display area 5HR or the like.

  In this embodiment, the first starting opening winning combination designation command or the second starting opening winning combination designation command which specifies whether the first starting winning opening has been started or the second starting winning opening has been started as holding storage information. While transmitting, the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command for specifying the first special map storage number and the second special image storage number are transmitted. In addition, when the number of pending storages increases, the pending storage number addition specification command (the first pending storage number addition specification command or the second indicates that the first special view pending storage number or the second special view pending storage number has increased). While the pending storage number addition designation command is transmitted, the pending storage number subtraction designation command (No. 1) indicates that the first special view pending storage number or the second special view pending storage number has decreased when the pending storage number decreases. A (1 pending storage number subtraction designation command or a second pending storage number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, a total pending storage number notification command for reporting the total pending storage number may be transmitted. Also, a total pending storage number addition designation command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) may be sent to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (determination result specification command at the time of winning) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol specifying command indicating the determination result of the big hit type, as a determination result of whether or not the variable display result is the "big hit" or the "small hit" is there. The command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating the determination result of the variation category (also referred to as “variation pattern type”) as the determination result at the time of winning. The variation category is a name when the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is classified (aggregated) according to the type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including variation patterns of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  In the present embodiment, at the time of winning random number value determination processing (see FIG. 15A), the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special view display result when the start winning is generated. And if it is determined to be a "big hit", and if it is determined to be a "big hit", determine the type of the big hit based on the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and change the category The variation category (variation pattern type) is determined based on the random number value MR3 for determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command and the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines whether the variable display result is determined as "big hit" or "small hit" based on the value set in the symbol designation command, or the big hit type. As well as being recognizable, it is possible to recognize a fluctuation category based on the value set in the fluctuation category command.

  The effect control commands such as the fluctuation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are used when the effect control CPU 120 controls one or more effect devices (such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp 9). . Hereinafter, the effect control command used to control the image display operation in the image display device 5 is a display control command, the effect control command used to control the audio output from the speaker 8 is an audio control command, the light emitting operation of the lamp 9 The effect control command used to control the lighting operation, the blinking operation, the lighting operation) is also referred to as a lamp control command. Among the effect control commands, there may be a display control command, an audio control command, and a lamp control command.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data, etc., and a work for game control. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 for executing a control operation by executing a game control program, and updating of numerical data representing a random number independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to be performed and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores it, and various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103 Data reading operation to read out the data, reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, to the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105 Also, a transmission operation for outputting various signals is performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view exemplifying a random number value counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, a random value MR1 for determining the special display result, a random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, a random value MR3 for determining the variation category, Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 for display result determination and the random number value MR5 for variation pattern determination is controlled so as to be countable. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating a part or all of the random numbers MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 updates the various numerical value data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of the MR 5 may be counted.

  Subsequently, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol will be described. Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “loss” is referred to as “loss fluctuation pattern”. In the lost fluctuation pattern, “non-reach fluctuation pattern (“ non-reach lost fluctuation pattern ”“ non-reach fluctuation pattern ”corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is“ non-reach ”in the case where the variable display result is“ loss ” (Also referred to as “variation pattern”) ”or“ reach variation pattern (“reach possibility variation pattern”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “loss” Also included).

  Also, a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit" is referred to as a "hit variation pattern". The hit variation pattern includes a "big hit variation pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" and a "small hit variation pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit". As the jackpot fluctuation patterns, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each of the jackpot types may be prepared.

  For the non-reach fluctuation pattern, prepare a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation times, corresponding to the time reduction control to be executed when the total number of pending storages is large or when the gaming state is a definite change state or a time reduction state It is good. Thus, control of shortening the fluctuation time according to the total number of pending storages and the gaming state can be performed by selecting any variation pattern according to the total pending storage number and the gaming state.

  For fluctuation patterns including reach effects such as a jackpot fluctuation pattern and a reach fluctuation pattern, fluctuation patterns corresponding to reach modes of the respective reach effects are prepared. In addition, the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed is referred to as “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is executed is referred to as “super reach fluctuation pattern”.

  FIG. 5 shows a specific example of variation categories and variation patterns in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the fluctuation category “PA1” is a shortening / non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern “PA1-1” belongs to the fluctuation category “PA1”. The fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” belong to the fluctuation category “PA2”. The fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern "PA3-1" and "PA3-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PA3". The fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” belong to the variation category “PA4”. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PA5”. The variation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation pattern "PB3-1" and "PB3-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PB3". The fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. The fluctuation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4” belong to the fluctuation category “PB4”. The variation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) variation category. The variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” belong to the variation category “PB5”.

  The fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the non-reach (loss). The fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the slip effect is executed. In addition, since slip production is performed, the special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern "PA2-2" is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of fluctuation pattern "PA2-1". The same applies to other variation patterns in which the slip effect is performed. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Note that the special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is longer than the special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to the other variation patterns in which the pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation pattern “PA1-1” belonging to the variation category “PA1” is a non-reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shorter than the variation pattern “PA2-1”.

The fluctuation pattern "PA3-1" belonging to the fluctuation category "PA3" is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a normal reach (loss). In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is performed once.
The fluctuation pattern “PA4-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a super reach α (loss). The fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gusset. The special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA4-2" is longer than the special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA4-1" because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gusset. The same applies to the other fluctuation patterns in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (rendering) is executed as a gusset.
The fluctuation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PA5-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a super reach β (loss). The fluctuation pattern “PA5-2” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gusset. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

The variation pattern "PB3-1" belonging to the variation category "PB3" is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as a normal reach (big hit). In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once.
The fluctuation pattern “PB4-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the super reach α (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gusset. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  The fluctuation pattern “PB5-1” belonging to the fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the super reach β (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed as a gusset. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is performed twice.

  In addition, in FIG. 5, although the description regarding the fluctuation pattern in case the big hit classification in a small hit fluctuation pattern and a big hit fluctuation pattern is exact is abbreviate | omitted, the lost fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern, It is the same as the reach loss fluctuation pattern) and the big hit fluctuation pattern (except when the big hit type is sudden).

  The ROM 101 of the microcomputer 100 for game control shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used to control the progress of the game, in addition to the program for game control. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 101 also includes data (for example, information for specifying the content of control commands) constituting a plurality of command tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main substrate 11, The data etc. which comprise a table as shown to 5 are memorize | stored.

  FIG. 6 shows an example of the configuration of the special view display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, as a special view display result determination table, a first special view display result determination table 130A shown in FIG. 6A and a second special view display result determination table 130B shown in FIG. It is prepared in advance. In the first special view display result determination table 130A, a finalized special symbol to be a variable display result is derived and displayed in the first special view game (the special view game using the first special view) by the first special symbol display device 4A. Previously, whether to control the variable display result to the big hit gaming state as "big hit", whether to control the variable display result to the small hit gaming state as "small hit", for special display display result determination Is a table referred to in order to determine based on the random value MR1. In the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a finalized special symbol as a variable display result is derived and displayed in the second special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure) by the second special symbol display device 4B Previously, whether to control the variable display result to the big hit gaming state as "big hit", whether to control the variable display result to the small hit gaming state as "small hit", for special display display result determination Is a table referred to in order to determine based on the random value MR1.

  In the first special view display result determination table 130A, the special view is displayed depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state or the short time state (low probability state) or the positive variation state (high probability state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for result determination is assigned to the special map display result of "big hit", "small hit", or "loss". In the second special view display result determination table 130B, disturbance for special view display result determination depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state or a short time state (low probability state) or a definite change state (high probability state). A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the numerical value MR1 is assigned to the special map display result of "big hit" or "loss".

  In each of the first special view display result determination table 130A and the second special view display result determination table 130B, when the gaming state is the probability change state (high probability state), it is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) More decision values than at times are assigned to the "big hit" special map display results. As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is a "big hit" as compared with the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) The probability of being determined to control the state is high.

  In the setting example of the first special figure display result determination table 130A, the determined value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "30000" to "30350") is assigned to the "small hit" special figure display result. On the other hand, in the setting example of the second special figure display result determination table 130B, the determination value is not assigned to the "small hit" special figure display result. With such a setting, the second special figure game does not become a "small hit", so a normally variable winning ball device 6B is formed, for example, a short time state (low probability high base state) or positive change state (high probability high base state). In the game state where it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of "small hit" which is difficult to obtain the winning ball, and to prevent the decline of the game interest due to the extension of the game .

  In the second special view display result determination table 130B and the first special view display result determination table 130A, determination values of different predetermined ranges may be allocated to the special view display result of “small hit”. For example, in the second special figure display result determination table 130B, a smaller determination value may be allocated to the "small hit" special figure display result compared to the first special figure display result determination table 130A. This makes it possible to avoid frequent occurrences of "small hits" in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. Alternatively, in the first special view game and the second special view game, the special view display result may be determined with reference to the common special view display result determination table.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the big hit type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type to any one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, when it is determined to control the special figure display result to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit". Is a table to be referenced. In the big hit classification determination table 131, the first special figure game (special figure game using the first special figure) by the first special symbol display device 4A is executed or the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B The numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type according to whether (the special figure game using the second special figure) is executed is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types such as.

  In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table 131, when the first special figure game is executed, that is, when the special figure to be varied (also referred to as a variation special figure) is the first special figure, the predetermined value of the predetermined range ( "82"-"99" value) is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable", but when the second special figure game is executed, if the variation special figure is the second special figure, The decision value is not assigned to the "probable" jackpot type. With such a setting, the second special figure game does not become "probable", so that it is possible to obtain a winning ball in the gaming state in which the gaming ball is likely to enter the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a difficult "probability" and to prevent the decline of the game interest due to the extension of the game.

  In addition, it may be made for the decision value of a different predetermined range to be allocated to the big hit classification of "probability" by the case where a fluctuation special drawing is the first special drawing and the fluctuation special drawing is the second special drawing. . For example, when the variation special view is the second special view, a smaller decision value may be allocated to the jackpot type of “probability” than when the variation special view is the first special view. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of "probability" in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B. Alternatively, the determination of the jackpot type may be made with reference to the common table data in the case where the variation special drawing is the first special drawing and the case where it is the second special drawing.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table which is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables that are different from each other in the types of variation categories that can be determined in the variation category determination table and the respective determination ratios. In the variation category determination table, each of the variation categories is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determination of the variation category. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of variation category determination tables in which the determination values (for example, the range and the number of the determination values, etc.) assigned to at least one variation category among the plurality of variation categories are mutually different There is. Note that one large change category determination table including information of all the change category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101 instead of the plurality of change category determination tables.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table to be referred to in order to determine one of the plurality of variation patterns. Specifically, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables that are different from each other in the types of fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the fluctuation pattern determination table and the determination ratio of each. In the fluctuation pattern determination table, numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination are assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns. That is, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables in which the above-described decision values (for example, the range and the number of decision values, etc.) allocated to at least one fluctuation pattern among a plurality of fluctuation patterns are mutually different There is. Note that, instead of the plurality of variation pattern determination tables, one large variation pattern determination table may be stored in the ROM 101 including information of each variation pattern determination table.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source, a part or all of which is created on a predetermined power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the content of a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply discharges and the power supply becomes unavailable) Ru. In particular, data indicating at least the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and data indicating the number of unpaid award balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data required to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after the power failure or the like occurs (eg Process flag etc. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 8, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. There is. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 8 is a first special view reserve storage unit 151A, a second special view reserve storage unit 151B, a common view reserve storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, a game A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is a special figure game (although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 6A and the first start winning occurs but has not yet started The reserve data (first special view reserve information) of the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special view reserve storage unit 151A is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of the game balls) to the first start winning opening, and the CPU 103 random number based on the passage (enter) of the game balls The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as reserve data (first special view reserve information) until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is a special figure game that is not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning occurs. The hold data (second special view hold information) of (the second special view game played by the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special view reserve storage unit 151B is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of the game balls) to the second start winning opening, random number by the CPU 103 based on the passage (enter) of the game balls The numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted from the circuit 104 and the like are stored as reserve data (second special view reserve information) until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  In addition, the hold data of the first special view game by the first special symbol display device 4A (the first special view hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition) and the second special view game of the second special symbol display device 4B The holding data (second special-image holding information based on the establishment of the second start winning) may be stored in the common holding storage unit in association with the holding number.

  The common drawing reserve storage unit 151C is a reserved data related to the common drawing game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the gaming ball that has passed the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 Store information). For example, the common drawing reserve storage unit 151C determines the common drawing display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the gaming ball in correspondence with the holding number in the order that the gaming ball passed the passing gate 41 The numerical value data indicating the random number value MR4 for the memory is stored as reserved data (general drawing reserve information) until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, in the game control counter setting unit 154, the first hold storage number count value, which is the storage value of the first hold storage number counter for counting the first special view hold storage number, and the second special view hold storage number The second pending storage number count value which is the storage value of the second pending storage number counter for counting, the total pending storage number count value which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number, etc. It is memorized.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 includes an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with a CPU for effect control 120 which performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data and the like, and a work area for the CPU 120 for effect control. RAM 122, the display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, etc., and the random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, the effect control board 12 executes a program for effect control read out from the ROM 121 by the effect control CPU 120 to execute a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 121, a change data write operation in which the effect control CPU 120 writes various change data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 in the RAM 122 Fluctuation data read operation to read out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, reception operation to receive various signal input from outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, the effect control CPU 120 to I / O for effect control CPU 120 A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image to the image display device 5 and an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating an instruction to the sound control substrate 13 are transmitted to the effect control substrate 12. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14, and the like are connected. Furthermore, in the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation on the stick controller 31A has been detected, or the game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that a user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, numerical data indicating various random number values used to control the effect operation is counted by the random number circuit 124 or the like in an updatable manner. The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data used to control the progress of the game, in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 120 for effect control to make various determinations, determinations, and settings.

  For example, the hold display mode determination table to be referred to in order to determine the display mode of the first hold display displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL to any one of a plurality of types is stored in the ROM 121 There is. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of pending display mode determination tables that are different from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the pending display mode determination table and the determination rates of the respective modes. In the pending display mode determination table, each of the display modes of the first pending display is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the first pending display. . Note that one large hold display mode determination table including information on all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121 instead of the plurality of hold display mode determination tables.

  In addition, for example, the ROM 121 stores a pending display mode determination table which is referred to in order to determine the display mode of the second pending display displayed in the second start winning storage display area 5HR to any one of a plurality of types. It is done. Specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of pending display mode determination tables that are different from each other in the types of display modes that can be determined in the pending display mode determination table and the determination rates of the respective modes. In the pending display mode determination table, each of the display modes of the second pending display is assigned a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR6 (not shown) for determining the display mode of the second pending display . Note that one large hold display mode determination table including information on all the hold display mode determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121 instead of the plurality of hold display mode determination tables.

  In addition, the ROM 121 stores a holding effect execution presence / absence determination table which is referred to in order to determine whether or not the holding effect (also referred to as an effect effect or a hold change effect) is performed. Specifically, in the holding effect execution presence / absence determination table, numerical values (decision values) to be compared with random value MR7 (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination for holding effect execution and without execution of holding effect, respectively. Is assigned. In the present embodiment, with the hold effect, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL is, for example, from the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. For example, the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice effect to be changed to the advance notice mode and the display mode of the hold display displayed in the second start winning memory storage display area 5HR, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the second start prize memory display area 5HR The pre-reading notice effect which is changed to the notice mode. The notice mode in the hold display is a display mode of the hold display for notifying that the specific display result is derived or displayed, and for notifying the specific gaming state. Note that there are a plurality of types of hold effects, and a hold change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the hold display. In the hold change effect, there is also a hold change change effect in which a character or the like acts on the hold display in the display area of the image display device 5 but does not change the display mode of the hold display.

  Further, the ROM 121 stores a specific display change effect execution presence / absence determination table which is referred to in order to determine whether or not the specific display change effect for changing the display mode of the specific display is performed. Specifically, the specific display change execution presence / absence determination table is compared with the random number MR7 (not shown) for determining the presence / absence of execution of the specific display change presentation without and with the specific display change presentation respectively A numerical value (decision value) is assigned.

  In the present embodiment, the specific display change effect is an effect (a main notice effect) in which the display mode of the specific display is changed to the advance notice mode. The notice mode in the specific display is a display mode of the specific display in which the specific display result is derived and displayed, or the advance notice of the specific gaming state. That is, for example, an active display, an active display frame surrounding the active display, information according to the active display (for example, characters or images displayed around the active display or active display or around the active display frame), for example This is an effect (main advance notice effect) of changing the display mode of the specific display from the display mode of the specific display displayed in the predetermined area to the advance notice mode. In the specific display change effect, as described above, the specific display change effect (also referred to as a success effect) when changing the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the pending display corresponding to the change is changed, or the display mode of the specific display is changed Specific display change case effect (also referred to as failure effect) and the like when not being caused are included. That is, the success effect is an effect that acts on the specific display in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the specific display, and the failure effect does not act on the specific display in the display area of the image display device 5 Accordingly, the effect of not changing the display mode of the specific display, or the effect of acting on the specific display in the display area of the image display device 5 but not changing the display mode of the specific display.

In addition, the ROM 121 stores an active display pattern determination table to be referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect mode) of the change erase redisplay effect which is one of the advance effect effects. ing. Specifically, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value (not shown) for determining the effect pattern of the active display effect (also referred to as the active display pattern) for each of the effect patterns of the erasure / redisplay effect at change It is assigned.
Here, when the change erase redisplay effect changes the display mode of the specific display according to the pending display corresponding to the change, the specific display is displayed on the active display area AHA, and the specific display is erased at a predetermined timing. In the specific timing after the predetermined timing, the specific display is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the specific display before erasing at the predetermined timing.

  Further, the ROM 121 stores a specific display change effect pattern determination table which is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of specific display change effects. Specifically, in the effect pattern determination table of the specific display change effect stored in the ROM 121, random number values (not shown) for determining the effect pattern of the specific display change effect for each of the effect pattern of the specific display change effect A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with is assigned.

Note that the ROM 121 stores an active display pattern determination table to be referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect mode) of the display effect during change which is one of the advance effects. It is also good. Specifically, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining an effect pattern of the active display effect (also referred to as an active display pattern) is assigned to each of the effect patterns of the indication effect upon change It should just be.
Here, the display effect upon change is a display mode of the hold display corresponding to the change and a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display, for example, a specific display corresponding to the display mode of the white hold display When the display mode of the white display mode is the white display mode and the white display mode corresponding to the variation is not the white display mode, for example, the blue display mode When in the display mode, it corresponds to the first special figure hold information or the second special figure hold information displayed in the start winning game storage display area 5H which is digested by the establishment of the first start condition or the establishment of the second start condition. It is an effect of deleting the hold display from the start winning storage display area 5H and displaying the specific display in the active display area AHA.

  In addition, in the ROM 121, an active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table (referred to in order to determine whether the active display change effect (also referred to as success effect or specific display change effect) to change the display mode of the specific display is performed A specific display change presentation execution presence / absence decision table) may be stored. Specifically, the active display change execution presence / absence determination table is compared with a random value MR8 (not shown) for execution presence / absence determination of active display change presentation without and with active display change presentation respectively. A numerical value (decision value) is assigned.

  Here, the active display change effect is an effect (main notice effect) in which the specific display is changed to the notice mode. That is, specific displays such as an active display, an active display frame surrounding the active display, and information corresponding to the active display (for example, characters or images displayed around the active display or the active display or around the active display frame) It is an effect (main notice effect) to be changed to the notice mode. For the active display change effect, as described above, the common effect and the success effect (also referred to as the active display change effect) executed when changing the specific display after the common effect is performed and the common effect are performed A failure effect (also referred to as an active display change cassette effect, or a specific display change cassette effect) to be executed later when the specific display is not changed may be included. The success effect may be an effect that acts on the specific display in the display area of the image display device 5 to change the display mode of the specific display. On the other hand, the failure effect does not act on the specific display in the display area of the image display device 5 so as not to change the display mode of the specific display, or acts on the specific display in the display area of the image display device 5 It may be any effect that does not change the display mode.

  In addition, in the active display change effect, the first system change effect in which the display mode of the specific display is changed to the display mode of the first system and is any of a plurality of display modes, and the display mode of the specific display A second system change effect may be included, which is a change of the second system and is changed to any one of the plurality of display modes. In addition, common effects, success effects, and failure effects corresponding to the first system change effect exist in the first system change effect, and in the second system change effect, the second system change effect is A common effect, a success effect, and a failure effect may be made to exist. The first system change effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display (the active display displayed as a special image), and the second system change effect is displayed as the active display frame of the specific display (the specific display An effect may be to change the display mode of the active display frame (also referred to as a specific display frame).

  Note that the first system change is referred to in the ROM 121 to determine the execution timing of the first system change effect (a timing such as which one of the variations is to be executed) which is one of the active display change effects. An execution timing determination table of effects may be stored. In the first system change effect, the ratio at which the success effect relating to the first system change effect is performed may be different depending on the execution timing of the first system change effect. In addition, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of first system change presentation effect execution timing determination tables which are different from one another in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the first system change presentation and the respective determination ratios It may be In the execution timing determination table of the first system change effect, numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random numbers (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change effect are assigned to each of the execution timings. Just do it. Also, in place of the plurality of first system change performance execution timing determination tables, one large first system change performance execution timing determination table including information of all the first system change performance execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121 You may memorize.

  Note that the second system change is referred to in the ROM 121 to determine the execution timing of the second system change effect (a timing such as which one of the variations is to be executed) which is one of the active display change effects. An execution timing determination table of effects may be stored. In the second system change effect, the ratio at which the success effect relating to the second system change effect is performed may be different depending on the execution timing of the second system change effect. In addition, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of second system change presentation effect execution timing determination tables which are different from one another in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the second system change presentation and the respective determination ratios. It may be In the execution timing determination table of the second system change effect, numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random numbers (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the second system change effect are assigned to each of the execution timings. Just do it. Also, in place of the plurality of second system change presentation execution timing determination tables, one large second system change presentation execution timing determination table including the information of all the second system change presentation execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121. You may memorize.

  In the ROM 121, there are a plurality of first system changes that are different from each other in type of execution timing, determination ratio, etc. that can be determined in the execution timing determination table of the first system change presentation and the execution timing determination table of the second system change presentation. A presentation execution timing determination table for presentation and an execution timing determination table for the second system change presentation may be stored as one large active display change presentation execution timing determination table. In the execution timing determination table of this active display change presentation, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the first system change presentation at each execution timing, the second system A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the change effect, or a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of both the first system change effect and the second system change effect A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with may be assigned. Also, in place of the plurality of active display change presentation execution timing determination tables, one large active display change presentation execution timing determination table including information of all the active display change presentation execution timing determination tables is stored in the ROM 121 It is also good.

  Further, the ROM 121 may store an active display change effect pattern determination table which is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of effect pattern (effect mode) of the active display change effect. Specifically, in the effect pattern determination table for active display change effects stored in the ROM 121, random number values (not shown) for determining the effect pattern of the active display change effects for each of the effect patterns for the active display change effects It is sufficient if a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with is assigned.

  Note that the hold change presentation execution timing determination table may be stored in the ROM 121, which is referred to determine the execution timing of the hold change presentation (the timing of how many subsequent changes are performed, etc.). The ROM 121 may also store a plurality of pending change presentation execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the pending change presentation execution timing determination table and the determination ratio of each. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the pending change presentation may be allocated to each of the execution timings in the pending change presentation execution timing determination table. Further, instead of the plurality of hold change presentation execution timing determination tables, one large hold change presentation execution timing determination table may be stored in the ROM 121 including information of all the hold change presentation execution timing determination tables.

Note that the ROM 121 stores a main notice effect pattern determination table to be referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of the other main notice effects of the above-mentioned active display change effect. It may be In this case, specifically, the ROM 121 stores a plurality of main notice effect pattern determination tables which are different from each other in the type of the main notice effect pattern that can be determined in the main notice effect pattern determination table and the determination ratio of each. It suffices that, in the main notice presentation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random notice value MR9 (not shown) for the main notice presentation pattern determination is assigned to each of the main notice presentation pattern. Good.
Note that, instead of the plurality of main notice presentation effect pattern determination tables, one large main notice presentation pattern determination table including information of all the main notice presentation pattern determination tables may be stored in the ROM 121.

  The ROM 121 may store a held change presentation pattern determination table to be referred to in order to determine the presentation pattern (presentation mode) of the held change presentation to any of a plurality of types. In this case, a value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for holding change effect pattern determination is assigned to each of the hold change effect pattern determination tables in the hold change effect pattern determination table in the ROM 121 Just do it.

  The ROM 121 may store a hold change determination effect execution presence / absence determination table which is referred to in order to determine whether the hold change operation is performed. In this case, the pending change cassette effect execution execution presence / absence determination table is compared with a random value (not shown) for deciding whether or not the pending change cassette effect is executed, with and without the pending change cassette effect execution. A decision value) may be assigned.

  The ROM 121 may store a pending change cassette effect execution timing determination table which is referred to determine the execution timing of the pending change cassette effect (a timing such as how many subsequent changes are to be executed). . In this case, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of pending change cassette effect execution timing determination tables that are different from each other in the type of execution timing that can be determined in the pending change cassette effect execution timing determination table and the respective determination ratios. . A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the execution timing of the pending change gusset presentation may be assigned to each of the execution timings in the pending change cassette presentation execution timing determination table . It should be noted that, instead of the plurality of pending change cassette effect execution timing determination tables, one large pending change cassette effect execution timing determination table may be stored in the ROM 121 including information of all pending change cassette effect execution timing determination tables.

  The ROM 121 may store a pending change cassette effect pattern determination table which is referred to in order to determine the rendering pattern (display mode) of the pending change cassette effect to any one of a plurality of types. In this case, a value (decision value) to be compared with a random value (not shown) for holding change change presentation effect pattern determination in each of the hold change change presentation effect pattern in the hold change change presentation effect pattern determination table is stored in the ROM 121. It may be assigned.

  In addition, in the ROM 121, an active display mode determination table (also referred to as a "detergent display mode determination table") referred to in order to determine the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA to any of a plurality of types. May be stored. In this case, the ROM 121 may store a plurality of display mode determination tables for different types of active display, which may be determined in the display mode determination table for the active display, the type of each determination mode, and the like. In the display mode determination table of the active display, it is only necessary to assign numerical values (decision values) to be compared with random numbers (not shown) for determining the display mode of the active display to each of the display modes of the active display. That is, in the ROM 121, the display modes of the plurality of active displays different from each other in the determination value (for example, the range and the number of the determination values, etc.) allocated to at least one display mode among the display modes of the plurality of types of active displays. It is sufficient if the decision table is stored. Note that, instead of the plurality of display mode determination tables of active display, one large active display mode determination table including information of display modes determination table of all active displays may be stored in the ROM 121.

  In addition, the ROM 121 is configured with a plurality of effect control patterns used to control the effect operation by the effect control CPU 120 using various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the effect model). Data etc. are stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as a decorative pattern, a notice effect (including a pre-reading notice effect), and the like are realized.

  The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating control contents of various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. For example, the effect control pattern is a decoration in a period from when the variation of the special symbol is started in the special view game until the finalized special symbol as the special view display result is derived and displayed, corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns. Representing operations in the variable display operation of the symbol, reach effect, re-lottery effect, etc., or various rendering operations not accompanied with the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, hold for display mode of the hold display in the first start winning memory display area 5HL It is comprised from the data etc. which show the control content of various production operation | movements, such as a production | presentation, the holding production | presentation with respect to the display mode of the pending | holding display in 2nd start prize memory display area 5HR, etc.).

  FIG. 9A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various effect operations such as effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, end code, It is sufficient if the contents of various effect control, the switching timing of effect control, etc. are set in series. In addition to the above, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for specifying the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. A value (determination value) to which the effect control process timer determination value is compared with the value (effect control process timer value) of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control microcomputer 120 And the determination value corresponding to the execution time (rendering time) of each rendering operation is set in advance. Note that, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, predetermined processing is executed as processing for controlling an effect operation in the effect control microcomputer 120 that a predetermined effect control command has been received from the main substrate 11 Data indicating switching timing or the like of effect control may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content such as event.

  The display control data includes, for example, data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data for specifying the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes, for example, data indicating a voice output mode from the speaker 8, such as data indicating an output mode such as a rendering sound interlocked with a variable display operation of the decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the voice control data is data designating a voice output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating a light emission operation mode of the lamp 9 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data for specifying the light emitting operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, light off operation) of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, a period in which an operation on an operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, and data indicating control content of a rendering operation in the case where the operation is effectively detected. That is, the operation detection control data is data for specifying a rendering operation according to the operation on the operation unit. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all of the effect control patterns, but are effect control patterns configured to include a part of control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram for describing various effect operations performed in accordance with the content of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 120 determines control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination values, and the character Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 5. Further, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and operation specified by the operation detection control data In the effective period, control for accepting the operation on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B and determining the contents of the effect is performed. Note that dummy data (data for which control is not specified) may be set as data corresponding to a component for effect that is not to be controlled even though it corresponds to the effect control process timer determination value.

  Although the rendering operation shown in FIG. 9 (B) corresponds to the entire period from the start of the variation of the decorative symbol to the final stop, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative symbol An effect control pattern may be provided to execute the effect operation in response to a partial period (e.g., a period in which the advance effect is performed). Alternatively, to perform the rendering operation in accordance with a predetermined period other than during variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the big hit gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state, etc.) An effect control pattern of may be provided.

  When setting the effect control pattern, pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read out from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or pattern data of the corresponding effect control pattern The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not any of the effect control process timer determination values match, and if it matches, the effect operation according to the corresponding various control data Control the As described above, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect device (the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. Advance the control of the movable member etc. provided in the effect model. In each of the process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to #n, voice control data # 1 to voice control Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control contents of the rendering operation in the rendering device, and an effect for designating execution of the effect control Control execution data # 1 to effect control execution data #n are configured.

  An instruction according to the effect control pattern set in this manner is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads image data indicated by the instruction from an image data memory such as a CGROM and temporarily stores the image data in the VRAM. Further, in the voice control board 13 receiving the command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and expands it by temporarily storing it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2, as an area for holding various data used to control the effect operation, for example, a data holding area 190 for effect control as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 10A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. There is.

  For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 or the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 10B is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. In the first start winning reception command buffer 194A, storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of pending storages are provided. . When there is a start winning to the first start winning opening, start opening winning combination designation command (first start opening winning combination designation command), symbol specification command, variation category command, pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command Is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 as one set of four commands. In the first start winning reception command buffer 194A, a storage area is secured so that among the commands, a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a first hold storage number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands from the top of the free space of the first start winning reception command buffer 194A in the order received at the first start winning. At the time of the first starting winning combination, command transmission is performed in the order of a first starting opening winning combination designation command, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a first hold storage number notification command. Therefore, if command reception is properly performed, as shown in FIG. 10B, in the storage area corresponding to each of buffer numbers “1” to “4”, the start opening winning combination designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation The category command and the first pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10B, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “3”.

  The commands stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 10B are deleted one by one each time variable display of a decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the first special view game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (the winning order of the commands). Specifically, when variable display of the decorative symbol is started interlockingly with the first special view game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the first starting opening winning a prize specified command One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponds to the first start opening winning combination designating command) The command is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the size relation of the buffer numbers).

  For example, when variable display of a decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the first special view game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10B, the command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "1" is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number “2” is shifted to buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number “3” becomes buffer number “2”. Be shifted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting the second start winning reception command buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 10C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. The second start winning reception command buffer 194B is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of pending storages. . When there is a start winning to the second starting winning opening, start opening winning combination designation command (second starting opening winning designation command), symbol specification command, variation category command, pending storage number notification command (second pending storage number notification command Is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 as one set of four commands. In the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, a storage area is secured such that a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a pending storage number notification command can be stored in association with each other among these commands.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands from the top of the free space of the second start winning reception command buffer 194B in the order received at the second start winning. At the second start winning combination, command transmission is performed in the order of a second start opening winning combination designation command, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a pending storage number notification command. Therefore, if command reception is normally performed, as shown in FIG. 10C, in the storage area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “1” to “4”, the second start opening winning combination designation command, the symbol designation command , Change category command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 10C, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “2”.

  The commands stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 10C are deleted one by one each time variable display of the decorative symbol is started in synchronization with the second special view game, Subsequent commands are shifted while maintaining the buffer number (the winning order of the commands). Specifically, when variable display of a decorative symbol is started interlockingly with the second special view game, the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the second start opening winning a prize designation command One stored command (one set) is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (corresponds to the second start opening winning combination designating command) The command is shifted while maintaining the winning order (the size relation of the buffer numbers).

  For example, when variable display of decorative symbols is started in synchronization with the second special figure game in the storage state shown in FIG. 10C, the command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "1" is deleted. The command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to buffer number "1".

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting the first preread notice buffer 194C as shown in FIG. 10D is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. Storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to respective data constituting the first start winning combination reception command buffer 194A are provided in the first read advance notice buffer 194C. That is, in the first read advance notice buffer 194C, the contents of the determination regarding the read advance notice effect related to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to Be done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B, for example, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the first read advance notice buffer 194C, the content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. In addition, in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 10B, the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is another buffer due to the start of variable display of the decorative symbol etc. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number are also shifted to the other buffer numbers in the first read advance notice buffer 194C.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting the second preread notice buffer 194D as shown in FIG. 10E is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. Storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”) corresponding to respective data constituting the second start winning combination reception command buffer 194B are provided in the second preread notice buffer 194D. That is, in the second preread notice buffer 194D, the contents of the determination regarding the preread notice effect relating to each hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 etc. are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “4”. Be done. When the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C, for example, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the second read advance notice buffer 194D, the content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. In addition, in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B of FIG. 10C, the pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is another buffer due to the start of variable display of the decorative symbol etc. When shifted to a number, the contents associated with the buffer number are also shifted to the other buffer numbers in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described.

  In the main substrate 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing to be gaming control main processing. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Further, the register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When initialization is complete, after enabling the interrupt, it enters loop processing. In the game control main process, the loop process may be entered after executing the process for restoring the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, whereby the gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, and the second starting opening via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). Thereafter, by executing predetermined information output processing, data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step S13).

  Following the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers such as the random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main substrate 11 side by software is executed (step S14). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B, opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 7 and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process processing, a normal symbol process processing is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process processing to control the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of the segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 20, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable in the normal variable winning prize ball device 6B Allows setting of tilting movement of winglet etc.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, effect control After control data is set in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the substrate 12, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By setting the switch to the off state, transmission of effect control commands based on settings in the command transmission table is enabled. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 11 as the special symbol process process. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S101 of FIG. 12 as the start winning determination process. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S208 and step S211 of FIG. 13 as the start winning processing. FIG. 15A is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S220 of FIG. 14 as random number value determination process at the time of winning.

  In the start winning determination process in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 13, CPU 103 first detects the detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is on based on (step S201). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the number of first special view reservations (the number of reservations for the first special view game) is a predetermined upper limit (for example, upper limit storage) It is determined whether or not "4" of (1) (step S202). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the number of first to-be-stored storages by reading the first to-be-stored storage number count value which is the storage value of the first to-be-stored storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. For example, when the first special figure storage number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1", for example ( Step S207).

  When the first start port switch 22A is off at step S201 (step S201; No), or when the number of first special view storage blocks has reached the upper limit at step S202 (step S202; Yes), After execution of the process of step S209, based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the second starting opening switch 22B Is checked (step S203). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step S203; Yes), the number of second special view reservations (the number of reservations for the second special view game) is a predetermined upper limit (for example, upper limit storage) It is determined whether or not "4" of (1) (step S204). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special image storage number by reading the second storage number count value, which is the storage value of the second storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special drawing reserve storage number is not the upper limit in step S204 (step S204; No), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" ( Step S210).

  After the process of step S207 is executed, the start winning process (FIG. 14) is executed (step S208), and the stored value of the start hole buffer is "0" (initialized) (step S209), and the process of step S203. Go to After the process of step S210 is executed, the start winning process (FIG. 14) is executed (step S211), and the stored value of the start hole buffer is "0" (initialized) (step S212). Finish. As a result, even if the start winning combination of the game balls is simultaneously detected in the first start opening switch 22A and the second start opening switch 22B, the processing based on each detection can be completed.

  As the start winning process (steps S208 and S211), the CPU 103 updates the number of special view storage locations according to the start opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the start opening buffer, by 1 (step S215 in FIG. 14). . For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the first pending storage number count value is incremented by one, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the second pending storage number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by one when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by one when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S215, the total number of pending storages is updated so as to add one (step S216). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to add one.

  After executing the processing of step S216, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special view display result, and the big hit type among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 and the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical value data indicating the random number value MR2 for random number and the random number value MR3 for variable category determination are extracted (step S217). Numeric data representing each random number value extracted in this manner is stored at the top of the empty entry in the special-image hold storage unit 151 according to the starting opening buffer value by being set as hold information (step S218). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, numerical data representing random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the first special image storage unit 151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, Numerical data representing random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in second special image storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the process of step S218, transmission setting of a starting opening winning combination designation command corresponding to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step S219). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting opening winning specified command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the transmission command buffer in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer, etc. The setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning combination designation command to 12 is performed. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning specified command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, etc. The setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning combination designation command is performed. For example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, the command control processing in step S17 shown in FIG. It is transmitted.

  Following the process of step S219, a winning random number value determination process is executed (step S220). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 The setting for setting is performed (step S221). For example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. It is transmitted.

  The CPU 103 determines the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by checking the status of the short time flag or the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like as the winning random number value determination process (step S220). Are identified (step S401 in FIG. 15A). The CPU 103 specifies that the probability variation state is on when the probability variation flag is on and the time reduction flag is off or the probability variation flag is on and the time reduction flag is on, and the probability variation flag is off and the time reduction flag is on or It may be specified that the time change state is on when the probability change flag is on and the time reduction flag is on, and that the normal state is on when the probability change flag is off and the time reduction flag is off. More specifically, when the probability change flag is on and the time saving flag is off, the CPU 103 identifies the high probability low base state, and when the probability change flag is on and the time saving flag is on, the CPU 103 determines high. When the high base state is specified and the probability change flag is off and the short time flag is on, the low probability high base state is specified, and when the probability change flag is off and the short time flag is off, low probability Identify low base.

  Subsequent to the process of step S401, from the table data constituting the first special view display result determination table 130A or the second special view display result determination table 130B, the starting opening buffer value (“1” or “2”) The special-image display result determination table data to be used to determine the special-image display result is selected in accordance with the gaming state (step S402). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the first special view display result determination table 130A is set in the use table. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the second special view display result determination table 130B is set in the use table. Thereafter, it is determined whether numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special image display result extracted in step S217 of FIG. 14 is within the predetermined big hit determination range (step S403). In the jackpot determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special view display result of “big hit” in the special view display result determination table data selected by the process of step S402 are set, and the CPU 103 sets random number value MR1 and so on. It is only necessary to determine the presence or absence of a decision value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the decision value one by one. Alternatively, the CPU 103 sets the random number MR1 and the minimum value and the maximum value of the big hit determination range by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination values included in the big hit determination range. It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not the random value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, it is determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be the "big hit" by determining that the random value MR1 is within the range of the big hit determination range (big hit start determination) it can.

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S403; No), it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step S404). The CPU 103 executes the same processing as in the case of the big hit determination range for the determination value assigned to the “small hit” special view display result in the special view display result determination table data selected by the process of step S402. It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not the random value MR1 falls within the small hitting determination range. If it is determined in step S404 that the small hit determination range is not within the range (step S404; No), a symbol designating command according to the case where the variable display result is "loss" to the effect control board 12 The setting for transmission is performed (step S405).

  If it is determined in step S404 that the small hit is within the small hit determination range (step S404; Yes), a symbol specifying command according to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is sent to the effect control board 12 And setting for transmission (step S407).

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special view (the “first special view” corresponding to “1” or the “second special view” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start opening buffer value. Then, the table data for determining the big hit type is selected from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table 131. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is determined. A setting for transmitting a symbol designating command according to the determination result by the process of step S409 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S410).

  After performing any of the processes of steps S405, S407, and S410, the variation category is determined (step S412). That is, the variation category is determined to any one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. In the process of step S412, the CPU 103 determines a plurality of variation category determination tables stored in the ROM 101 (determination of a plurality of variation categories having different types of variation categories and determination percentages that can be determined in the variation category determination table). Select one of the variation category determination tables to be set as the usage table from the table).

  Specifically, the CPU 103 can display the special view display result (for example, the determination result of step S403 or step S404) or the number of pending storage (for example, the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154). Any variation category determination table to be set as a use table is selected based on the first pending storage number count value which is a stored value). Subsequently, the CPU 103 uses a variation category determination table set as a use table, and numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for variation category determination extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Based on the change category, one of the plurality of change categories is determined.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of selection of the variation category determination table. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the variation category determination table. The configuration example of this variation category determination table is four types of variation category tables that are referenced to determine one of a plurality of variation categories. FIG. 17A is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on a variation category determination table of the above four types (denoted as “C-TBL1” in the figure). FIG. 17B is a configuration example of a variation category determination table based on another variation category determination table (denoted as "C-TBL2" in the figure). FIG. 17C is a configuration example of a variation category determination table according to another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL3” in the figure). FIG. 17C is a configuration example of a variation category determination table according to another variation category determination table (denoted as “C-TBL4” in the figure). In order to simplify the description, a variation category determination table in which a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 17A is set may be referred to simply as the variation category determination table of FIG. 17A. The same applies to other determination tables such as FIGS. 17B to 17D and the variation pattern determination table. FIG. 16 is a selection example of selecting any setting from among the four types (setting “C-TBL1” to setting “C-TBL4”) of FIG. 17A to FIG. This is a selection example of selecting any of the variation category determination tables from among four types of variation category determination tables.

  The variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A (the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 17C, In the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” of (D), numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for variation category determination are assigned to a plurality of types of variation categories.

  In the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, 0 out of 100 (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the determined values of the random number MR3 is a fluctuation category 70 (values in the range of “0” to “69”) assigned to “PA1” are assigned to the change category “PA2”, and 27 (values in the range of “70” to “96”) are change category Allocated to "PA3", 2 (values in the range of "97" to "98") are allocated to the fluctuation category "PA4", and 1 (value "99") is allocated to the fluctuation category "PA5" There is. That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 17A, the variation category “PA1” is 0% (0 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA2” is 70% (70 ÷ 100), The variation category "PA3" is determined at a ratio of 27% (27 ÷ 100), the variation category "PA4" at 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category "PA5" at a ratio of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, four of the 100 (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the determined values of the random number MR3 (“0 "-" Value of "3" is assigned to the variation category "PA1", 85 (value of "4" to "88") is assigned to the variation category "PA2", and eight ("89" "-" Value of "96" is assigned to the variation category "PA3", 2 (values in the range of "97" to "98") is assigned to the variation category "PA4", 1 (value " 99 ") is assigned to the variation category" PA5 ". That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” in FIG. 17B, the variation category “PA1” is 4% (4 × 100), the variation category “PA2” is 85% (85 × 100), The variation category "PA3" is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category "PA4" at 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category "PA5" at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 17C, 64 (“0” of “100” (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the determined values of the random number MR3). '-'63' are assigned to the variation category 'PA1', 25 ('64'-'88' values) are assigned to the variation category 'PA2', eight ('89' "-" Value of "96" is assigned to the variation category "PA3", 2 (values in the range of "97" to "98") is assigned to the variation category "PA4", 1 (value " 99 ") is assigned to the variation category" PA5 ". That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL3” in FIG. 17C, the variation category “PA1” is 64% (64 ÷ 100), and the variation category “PA2” is 25% (25 ÷ 100), The variation category "PA3" is determined at a rate of 8% (8 ÷ 100), the variation category "PA4" at 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the variation category "PA5" at a rate of 1% (1 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 17D, 20 (“0” of “100” (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the determined values of the random number MR3. "-" Value in the range of "19" is assigned to the variation category "PB3", 40 (value in the range of "20" to "59") is assigned to the variation category "PB4", and 40 pieces ("60" The value range of “99” is assigned to the variation category “PB5”. That is, in the setting example of the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL4” in FIG. 17D, the fluctuation category “PB3” is 20% (20 × 100) and the fluctuation category “PB4” is 40% (40 × 100), The variation category "PB5" is determined at a rate of 40% (40 ÷ 100).

  In the setting example of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the special view display result is “loss”, shortening / non-reach (when the number of pending storages is large compared to when the number of pending storages is small) Loss) The percentage of change categories (change category “PA1”) is increased. Specifically, the determination ratio "64%" of the fluctuation category "PA1" in the fluctuation category determination table "C-TBL3" selected when the special map display result is "loss" and the number of reserved memories "4". > Determining ratio "4%" of the fluctuation category "PA1" in the fluctuation category determination table "C-TBL2" selected when the special drawing display result is "loss" and the number of pending memories "3" or "2" The determination ratio “0%” of the fluctuation category “PA1” in the fluctuation category determination table “C-TBL1” selected when the special view display result is “loss” and the number of pending storages “1”.

  Moreover, in the setting example of FIG. 17 (A)-FIG.17 (C), when a special figure display result is "loss", the variation category (super reach (loss)) of the number of pending memory is large or small. The determination ratio of the fluctuation category “PA4” or the fluctuation category “PA5”) is fixed. Specifically, in any of the variation category determination table "C-TBL1", the variation category determination table "C-TBL2", and the variation category determination table "C-TBL3", the determination ratio of the variation category "PA5" It is assumed that the percentage of the change category "PA4" is "2%".

  Moreover, in the setting example of FIG. 17 (A)-FIG. 17 (C), it is any of fluctuation category determination table "C-TBL1", fluctuation category determination table "C-TBL2", and fluctuation category determination table "C-TBL3" Even if it exists, the determined value of the random value MR3 is made to correspond to the same (common) change category (the same change category is determined). That is, if the determined value of the random number MR3 is a certain value, any of the variation category determination table "C-TBL1", the variation category determination table "C-TBL2", and the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" Also, the same variation category is determined. For example, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is "99", any of the variation category determination table "C-TBL1", the variation category determination table "C-TBL2", and the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" Also, the variation category "PA5" is determined. Further, when the determined value of the random value MR3 is a value in the range of "97" to "98", the variation category "PA4" is determined regardless of which of the above-mentioned variation category determination tables.

  Further, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is a value in the range of "89" to "96", the variation category "PA3" is determined regardless of which of the above-mentioned variation category determination tables. Further, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is a value in the range of "64" to "69", the variation category "PA2" is determined regardless of which of the variation category determination tables described above. As a result, if the determined value of the random number MR3 is a certain value (value of each range described above), it becomes reach, super reach, super reach α, and super reach β in advance. It can be easily determined. Therefore, it is possible to notify them of the variable display corresponding to the start winning, etc., and to improve the interest in the game. In the setting example of FIGS. 17A to 17C, when the determined value of the random number MR3 is a value in the range of “0” to “69”, the variation category determination table “C-TBL1”, The variation category “PA1” or “PA2” is determined whether the variation category determination table “C-TBL2” or the variation category determination table “C-TBL3”. In this way, it is possible to easily determine in advance at least that it is not a reach.

  Thereafter, according to the determination result (determination result) by the process of step S412, after setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands shown in FIG. S413), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 of FIG. 12, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. And run.

  The special symbol normal processing of step S110 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is to be "big hit" or "small hit". To be done. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “1”. The special symbol normal processing will be described later.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, a process of deciding the variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types shown in FIG. 5, a first variation start command (or a second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, and a variable display result notification command The transmission setting process for transmitting etc. is included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2". The setting of the fluctuation pattern will be described later.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process to make settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special figure variation timer value which is the storage value in the special figure variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 is decremented by 1 or incremented by 1 1 A first special view game (a special view game using a first special view) by the special symbol display device 4A or a second special view game by a second special symbol display device 4B (a special view using a second special view) A common timer measures the elapsed time regardless of whether it is a figure game). Further, it is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Thus, the special symbol variation processing in step S112 may be processing for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special view game or the second special view game by the common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol as the variable display result of the special symbol is stopped (displayed) It includes the process of making settings for Then, it is determined whether the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on or not, and if the big hit flag is on, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". Be done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, the value of the special process process flag is updated to "8". When the big hit flag and the small hit flag are both off, the value of the special process process flag is updated to "0".

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, based on the variable display result becoming "big hit", etc., the process of performing the setting for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and opening the big winning opening include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period in which the big winning opening is in the open state may be set according to whether the jackpot type is "non-probability", "probability", or "probability". As an example, corresponding to the jackpot type "non-probability" or "probability", set the upper limit of the period when the big winning opening is in the open state to "29 seconds", and the number of big wins that will be the upper limit number of times to execute the round By setting the number of times of opening the mouth to “15 times”, setting may be performed to set the normally open big hit state. On the other hand, the jackpot type corresponds to "probable", and while setting the upper limit of the period for which the big winning opening is in the open state, to "0.1 seconds", the number of opening times of the winning opening that becomes the upper limit number of times to execute the round By setting “15 times”, setting may be made to be a short-term open jackpot state. At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open processing of step S115 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. It includes a process of determining whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the processing of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed, and then the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6". .

  The big hit opening post process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "6". In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened reached the large winning opening opening frequency maximum value, the winning opening opening frequency maximum value was reached In this case, the process of setting for transmitting the big hit end designation command is included. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the maximum winning opening open number maximum value, while the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5", when the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value is reached, the special drawing The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

  The big hit end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this big hit end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which ending effect as a rendering operation is performed to notify the end of the big hit gaming state by a rendering device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, etc. The processing includes processing for waiting until, and processing for performing various settings for starting the probability change control and the time saving control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state. When such setting is performed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0".

  The small hit opening pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "8". The small hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of setting for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the variable display result being "small hit". As an example, when the variable display result is "small hit", the upper limit of the period for opening the big winning opening is the same as when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type becomes "probable". The setting for the small hit gaming state may be performed by setting “0.1 seconds” and setting the opening number of the special winning opening to “15 times”. At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "9".

  The small hit open processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "9". In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closing state based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening and the measured elapsed time, etc. Processing for determining whether or not it is included is included. When returning the special winning opening to the closed state, processing for stopping supply of a drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door may be executed. At this time, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "10".

  The small hitting end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special process process flag is "10". In this small hitting end processing, it waits until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hitting gaming state is executed by a rendering device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, etc. Processing is included. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the state of the probability change flag or the time saving flag is not changed, and the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 12 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first determines whether the number of second special view reservations is "0" (step S231). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second special view game is on hold. For example, in the process of step S231, the second hold storage count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether the read value is "0".

  When it is determined in step S231 that the number of second special view reservations is other than “0” (step S231; No), the suspension stored corresponding to the suspension number “1” in second special view suspension storage unit 151B. As data, a random number value MR1 for determining the special view display result and a random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type are read out (step S232). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, the second special storage storage count is updated by subtracting one, for example, by subtracting the second storage storage count value by one, and the second special storage storage is updated. Shifts pending data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the pending number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to pending numbers “2” to “4”) in section 151B by one entry at a time (Step S233). In addition, in the process of step S233, the gaming control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total suspension storage count count value stored in the total suspension storage count counter. At this time, the variation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the variation special figure designation buffer is updated to "2" (step S234).

  When the number of second special figure holding memories is "0" at step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether the number of first special drawing holding memories is "0" (step S235). That is, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special view game is suspended. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage count counter and determines whether the read value is "0". Just do it.

  As described above, since the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the number of second special view reservations is "0", the first special view game and the second special special game are executed. When the figure game is suspended, the second special figure game is executed with priority over the first special figure game. In addition, it is not limited to the aspect in which the second special view game is executed with priority over the first special view game, and the game ball enters (passes through the start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) ) And the special figure game (first special figure game, second special figure game) may be executed in the order in which the start winning prize (first start prize, second start prize) occurs. In this case, it is sufficient to provide a table for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the start winning is generated, and to determine which one of the first special figure game and the second special figure game is to be executed from the stored data.

  When it is determined in step S235 that the number of first special view reservations is other than “0” (step S235; No), the suspension stored corresponding to the suspension number “1” in first special view suspension storage unit 151A. As data, random number value MR1 for special figure display result decision and numerical data which show random number value MR2 for big hit classification decision are read out respectively (step S236). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of step S 236, the first TOC pending memory number is updated to be decremented by 1 by, for example, subtracting 1 from the first pending memory number count value, and so on. Shifts pending data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the pending number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to pending numbers “2” to “4”) in section 151A upward by one entry (Step S237). Further, in the process of step S 237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total suspension storage count count value stored in the total suspension storage count counter. At this time, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

  After executing any of the processes in steps S234 and S238, use the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, as a use table for determining which of “big hit” and “losing”. Similar to the process of step S402 shown in FIG. 15A, the special-image display result determination table data is selected (step S239). That is, in the process of step S402, the first special view display result determination table 130A or the second special view display result determination table 130B is set in the use table according to the starting opening buffer value (“1” or “2”). In the process of step S239, when the fluctuation special drawing designation buffer value is "1", the first special drawing display result determination table 130A is set in the use table, and the fluctuation special drawing designation buffer value is "2". In this case, the second special view display result determination table 130B may be set in the use table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special image display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is assigned to the respective special image display results of "big hit", "small hit", and "lost" In comparison with the value, it is determined whether the special figure display result is to be "big hit", "small hit" or "loss" (step S240).

  After the special view display result is determined in step S240, it is determined whether the special view display result is a "big hit" (step S241). When it is determined that the "big hit" (step S241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type as any of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the jackpot type determination table 131 set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer for variation is “non-probability”, “probability”, In accordance with which of the determination values assigned to each jackpot type, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S244).

  Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting the jackpot type buffer value which is the storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the jackpot type determined Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “0”, if “probability change”, “1”, and if “probability”, “2” may be set.

  If it is determined in step S241 that "big hit" is not made (step S241; No), it is determined whether the special map display result is "small hit" (step S246). When it is determined that the "small hit" (step S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S247).

  If it is determined in step S246 that the game is not a "small hit" (step S246; No) or after executing any of the processes in steps S245 and S247, whether to control to a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state A finalized special symbol is set corresponding to the result of the prior decision of the decision and the determination result of the big hit type in the case of the big hit gaming state (step S248).

  After setting the finalized special symbol in step S248, the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and the special symbol normal processing is ended. . If the number of reserved memories of the special drawing game using the first special drawing in step S235 is "0" (step S235; Yes), after performing predetermined demonstration display setting (step S250), the special symbol End normal processing. In this demonstration display setting, for example, a presentation control command (waiting customer demonstration designation command) for specifying a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5, etc. It is determined whether transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demonstration display setting is ended.

  In the variation pattern setting process of step S111, the CPU 103 selects the variation category determination random value MR3 and the variation pattern determination from among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 and the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical data indicating the random value MR5 is extracted. The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 19, the CPU 103 determines a fluctuation category as in step S412 shown in FIG. 15A (step S261). Note that, in the process of step S261, the CPU 103 newly extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, and uses the numerical data indicating the newly extracted random number value MR3 for determining the variation category. The variation that has already been extracted at the time of winning (step S217 in FIG. 14) and is stored as suspension information in the first special view suspension storage unit 151A (or the second special view suspension storage unit 151B). The variable category may be determined using numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the category. In addition, even when using numerical data stored as pending information or using newly extracted numeric data, this corresponds to the number of pending storages when the variation pattern setting process is executed. Based on the variation category determination table, the variation category according to the number of pending storages at the start of the variation is determined.

  Subsequently to the process of step S261, a variation pattern according to the random value MR5 for variation pattern determination is determined (step S262). In the process of step S262, the CPU 103 first selects any one of the variation pattern determination tables corresponding to the variation category determined in step S261 from among the plurality of variation pattern determination tables. For example, when the variation category “PB3” is determined in step S261, determination values are assigned to each of the variation patterns (“PB3-1” and “PB3-2”) that are variation patterns “PB3-X”. When the variation pattern determination table is selected and the variation category "PA4" is determined in step S261, the variation pattern in which the determination value is assigned to each of the plurality of variation patterns that are the variation pattern "PA4-X" Select a decision table. Subsequently, the CPU 103 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 and the game control counter setting unit 154, and selects the selected fluctuation pattern. It is determined whether there is numerical data representing the extracted random pattern determination random number value MR5 within the determination range of any variation pattern in the table. That is, in the process of step S262, the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation category is determined. That is, when the current gaming state (normal state, definite change state, time saving state, etc.), special view display result, number of reserved memories, special view display result is a big hit, a fluctuation pattern according to the big hit type is determined.

  Thereafter, a special-image variation time corresponding to the determination result (determination result) by the process of step S262 is set (step S263). Thereafter, setting is made to start the variation of the special symbol so as to start either the first special figure game or the second special figure game according to the variation special figure designation buffer value (step S 264). As an example, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  After execution of the process of step S264, setting for transmitting various commands used at the start of variable display of special symbols is performed (step S265). The various commands set in this way are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 11 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. . Thereafter, the value of the special view process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S266), and the variation pattern setting process is ended.

  Note that, as described above, when there is a determination value of the random value MR3 corresponding to the same variation category in any of the variation category determination tables according to the number of pending storages, it corresponds to the same variation category When the random number value MR3 that matches the determination value is extracted at the time of winning, the number of pending storages is between the execution of the winning random number determination process (step S220) and the execution of the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S111). Even if there is a large difference, in the variation pattern setting process, the same variation category as in the winning random number value determination process is determined.

  For example, in the specific example of the variation category determination tables “C-TBL1” to “C-TBL3” described above, if the random number value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is “99”, for example The variation category "PA5" is determined in both the time random number value determination process and the variation pattern setting process. In addition, if random number value MR3 extracted at the time of winning is in the range of, for example, "97" to "98", fluctuation category "PA4" regardless of the number of pending storages, in random number determination processing in winning or fluctuation pattern setting Is determined. In the process of step S261, it is preferable to determine the fluctuation category using the random number value MR3 for fluctuation category determination stored as pending data, but the CPU 103 newly selects the random number value MR3 for fluctuation category determination. The variation category may be determined using the extracted and newly extracted random value MR3 for determining the variation category.

  Subsequently, the CPU 103 uses the newly extracted random number value MR3 for determining the variation category to determine a variation category as in step S412. That is, as shown in FIG. 16, based on the special drawing display result and the number of pending storages, the variation category determination table to be used is selected from among the plurality of variation category determination tables shown in FIG. The variation category is determined based on the table and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects, from among the plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables stored in the ROM 101, any one of the fluctuation pattern determination tables to be set as the use table, based on the fluctuation category which is the determination result. Subsequently, the CPU 103 selects one of a plurality of types of variation patterns based on the variation pattern determination table set as the use table and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR5 for determination of the variation pattern described above. Decide.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination ratio of the variation pattern. The ROM 101 stores eight variation pattern determination tables corresponding to variation categories. FIG. 20A is a setting example of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern by the fluctuation pattern determination table which is selected when the fluctuation category is “PA1 (shortened / non-reach lost)” among the eight types described above. FIG. 20B is a setting example of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern by the fluctuation pattern determination table selected when the fluctuation category is “PA2 (non-reach (losing))” among the above eight types. FIG. 20C is a setting example of the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern by the fluctuation pattern determination table selected when the fluctuation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the above eight types. Hereinafter, the same applies to FIGS. 20 (D) to 20 (H).

  As described above, on the main board 11, in the start winning determination process of step S101, transmission setting for transmitting the start opening winning combination designation command according to the start opening buffer value to the effect control board 12 is performed ( Transmission setting is performed to transmit the symbol designation command according to the special view display result determined in step S219), steps S403, S404, S409, etc. (steps S405, S407, S410), and determined in step S412. The transmission setting for transmitting the fluctuation category command according to the fluctuation category is performed (step S413), and the transmission setting for transmitting the pending storage count notification command is performed (step S221).

  After these processes are executed, the game ball passes (enters) the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) by executing the command control processing of step S17 shown in FIG. When the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the start opening winning combination designation command (the first start opening winning combination designation command or the second start opening winning combination designation command), the symbol specification command, the variation category command, the pending storage number notification Four commands of commands (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt as one set.

  In addition, in main substrate 11, in special symbol normal processing of step S110, the special design symbol which becomes the variable indicatory result of special symbol making use of random number value MR1 for special figure display result decision and random number value MR2 for big hit classification decision In the variation pattern setting process of step S111, the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is determined using the random number value MR3 for variation category determination, the random number value MR5 for variation pattern determination, and the like.

Furthermore, in the variation pattern setting process of step S111, a variable display result notification command for designating the determined special symbol determined as described above, a variation pattern designating command for designating a variation pattern of the decorative pattern determined as described above, etc. Transmission setting for transmitting to the effect control board 12 is performed. When variable display is started by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 11 after these processes are executed, the variable display result notification command, the variation pattern specification command, etc. are within one timer interrupt. Sent to the
In addition, it is not limited to what is collectively transmitted in 1 timer interruption, and one command may be sequentially transmitted by the command control process of step S17 for every timer interruption.

  That is, at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) in the special symbol normal processing (step S110) is a big hit as a "big hit" or "small hit" It is determined whether or not to control the gaming state and the small hitting gaming state, the variation pattern setting process (step S111) to determine the specific variable display mode (variation pattern) of the decorative symbol, etc., respectively The content determined by the effect control command of is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Also, prior to this, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening), the winning random number value determination process (step S220) Judgment as to whether or not to be controlled in the big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state as "small hit", the determination of the rough variable display mode (fluctuation category) of the decorative symbol, etc. are performed, determined by each effect control command The content that has been sent is sent to the effect control board 12.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 21 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12 Performs register settings etc. of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; No), the process of step S72 is repeatedly performed and the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 occurs separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but interrupts using the CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, control to be a rendering control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 Capture the signal.

  The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on at step S72 (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main substrate 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read and then read. Settings, control, and the like corresponding to the output control command issued are performed.

  After the command analysis process is performed in step S74, an effect control process process is performed (step S75). In the effect control process of step S75, various effect devices such as display operation of effect image in display area of image display device 5, sound output operation from speaker 8, light emission operation of lamp 9, drive operation of effect model, etc. With regard to the control content of the rendering operation using the above, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to the rendering control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 are performed.

  Following the effect control process of step S75, effect random number updating process is executed (step S76), and the effect random number is counted by the random counter of effect control counter setting unit 193 as various random number values used for effect control The numerical data representing the is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of step S72.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S74 of FIG. 21 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer, etc., whereby the received command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 is It is determined whether there is any (step S501). At this time, if there is no reception command (step S501; No), the command analysis process is ended.

  If there is a received command at step S501 (step S501; Yes), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first starting opening winning combination designated command (Step S502). Then, when it is the first starting opening winning combination designating command (step S502; Yes), the first hold storage number notification waiting time is set (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. Just do it.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the received command is not the first starting opening winning combination designation command (step S502; No), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting opening winning combination designation command (step S504). Then, when it is the second starting opening winning combination designating command (step S504; Yes), the second holding storage number notification waiting time is set (step S505). For example, in the process of step S505, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage count notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If it is determined in step S504 that the received command is not the second starting opening winning combination designating command (step S504; No), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designating command (step S506). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at step S506 (step S506; No), it is determined whether the received command is a variation category command (step S507). If it is determined in step S507 that the received command is not a change category command (step S507; No), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage count notification command (step S508). Then, when it is the first pending storage number notification command (step S508; Yes), the first pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared, for example, by initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer (step S509). .

  If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command in step S508 (step S508; No), it is determined whether the receiving command is the second pending storage number notification command (step S510). Then, when it is the second pending storage number notification command (step S510; Yes), for example, the second pending storage number notification waiting time is cleared by initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer (step S511) .

  When the received command is the symbol designation command at step S506 (step S506; Yes), or when the received command is the variation category command at step S507 (step S507; Yes), or steps S503, S505, S509, and S511. After performing any of the processes in step S503, if the first pending storage count notification wait time is set in the process of step S503 for the received command received one before the received command, the received command is not selected. (1) After the start winning combination reception command buffer 194A is stored at the top of the free space (step S512), the process returns to step S501.

  If the received command is the symbol designation command in step S506 (step S506; Yes), or if the received command is the variation category command in step S507 (step S507; Yes), or steps S503, S505, and S509. , And S511, if the second pending storage count notification wait time is set in the processing of step S503 for the reception command received immediately before the reception command, the reception command Is stored at the top of the free space in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B (step S512), and the process returns to step S501.

  If the first pending storage count notification command is received together with the first change start command, the pending storage count notification command may not be stored in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning may be sequentially stored from the top of the free space in the first start winning received command buffer 194A.

  When the second pending storage count notification command is received together with the second change start command, the pending storage count notification command may not be stored in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B. That is, the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning may be sequentially stored from the top of the empty area in the second start winning received command buffer 194B.

  If it is determined in step S510 that the received command is not the second pending storage count notification command (step S510; No), settings according to the other received commands are performed (step S513), and the process returns to step S501. For example, when the received command is a game state specification command, the game state specification command is analyzed to specify the current game state. Also, for example, when the received command is a hit end designation command, the hit end designation command is analyzed to specify whether the time is short or not.

  Start opening winning combination designation command (first start opening winning combination designation command or second start opening winning combination designation command), symbol specification command, variation category command, pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command, second pending storage number As in the notification command), the effect control command received from the main substrate 11 when the start winning combination occurs is also referred to as a command at the start winning combination. In addition, the first holding storage number notification command, the second holding storage number notification command, the first starting opening winning combination designation command, and the second starting opening winning combination designation command are also referred to as holding storage information. Further, the symbol designation command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information.

  When the reception command is sequentially stored from the top of the free space in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A, the reception command is any of a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a first hold storage number notification command. It may be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the top of the free space in the corresponding storage area.

  In addition, when the reception command is sequentially stored from the top of the free space in the second start winning reception command buffer 194B, which of the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the second pending storage number notification command is the reception command It may be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the top of the free space in the corresponding storage area.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 21 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 23, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a winning effect determination process (step S150). FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S150 of FIG. 23 as the effect determination process at the time of winning.

  In the effect determination process at the time of winning shown in FIG. 24, the CPU 120 for effect control first stores the storage contents in the start winning at receiving command buffer (the first start winning receiving command buffer 194A or the second start winning receiving command buffer 194B). A check is made (step S151), and it is determined whether or not the first starting opening winning combination designation command has been received as a new reception command (step S152). If it is determined in step S152 that the first starting opening winning combination designation command has not been received (step S152; No), the storage content in the second starting winning reception command buffer 194B is checked (step S153), and a new It is determined whether the 2nd starting opening winning a prize specified command is received as a received command (Step S153). When it is determined in step S154 that the second starting opening winning combination designation command has not been received (step S154; No), the effect determination process at the time of winning is ended.

If it is determined in step S152 that the first starting opening winning combination designation command has been received (step S152; Yes), it is specified that the time saving is not performed in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. (Step S155: NO), the first holding effect determination process is executed (step S160). The first hold effect determination process includes a process of determining a display mode (also referred to as an additional display mode) of the hold display when the first start winning a prize storage display area 5HL is additionally displayed.
In addition, in the case of executing a hold change effect or a hold change change effect on the hold display when additionally displaying in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, whether the hold change effect or the hold change case effect is executed in the corresponding step A process of determining whether or not the process is performed, or a process of determining the execution timing of the hold effect when it is determined to execute the hold effect may be performed.

First, the determination process of determining the display mode of the hold display when additionally displaying in the first start winning storage display area 5HL will be described.
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode at the time of addition of the hold display. It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores seven types of pending display mode determination tables according to the variation category. FIG. 25 (A) shows the pending display mode selected when the variation category "PA1 (shortened / not reached lost)" or the variation category "PA2 (not reached (missed))" among the seven types described above. It is a setting example (H-TBL1) of the determination ratio of the display mode of a pending | holding display by a determination table. FIG. 25B is a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the suspension display by the suspension display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the seven types described above ( H-TBL2). FIG. 25C shows the setting of the display ratio determination ratio of the suspension display according to the suspension display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA4 (super reach α (loss))” among the seven types described above. An example (H-TBL3).

  FIG. 25D is a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the suspension display by the suspension display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA5 (super reach β (loss))” among the above seven types. 25E shows the display of the pending display by the pending display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PB3 (normal reach (big hit))” among the above seven types. Fig. 25F is a setting example (H-TBL5) of the determination ratio of the aspect, and Fig. 25F is a suspension selected when the variation category is "PB4 (super reach α (big hit))" among the above seven types. It is a setting example (H-TBL6) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the suspension display by a display mode determination table. (G) of FIG. It is a setting example (H-TBL7) of the determination ratio of the display mode of a pending | holding display by the pending | holding display mode determination table selected when it is "(beta) (big hit)."

  According to FIG. 25, for example, in the case of reach, compared to the case of non-reach, the upper color, for example, red or yellow is more easily determined, and the lower color, for example, blue or white (initial color) is determined. It is difficult to do. In addition, in the case of a reach, when the hot reach (for example, a high expected degree for which a specific display result is derived and displayed is high reach, a super reach) is not hot reach (for example, a specific display result is derived from a hot reach) Compared to when the degree of expectation is low (reach, normal reach), upper colors such as red and yellow are more easily determined, and lower colors such as blue and white are less determined. Or according to FIG. 16, FIG. 17 and FIG. 25, when the special figure display result is "big hit", the upper color such as red or yellow is determined as compared with the special figure display result is "loss" It is difficult to determine the lower color such as blue or white. In other words, the display mode of upper colors such as red and yellow has higher expectation for performing hot effects and the expectation for becoming a big hit, compared with display modes for lower colors such as blue and white. ing. More specifically, hot effects (for example, effects with a high degree of expectation that a specific display result is derived and / or effects with a high degree of expectation controlled to a specific gaming state, etc.) are executed in the order of red, yellow, blue and white The degree of expectation to be done and the degree of expectation to be a big hit are high.

  That is, in the first hold effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 sets the plurality of hold display modes shown in FIG. 25 based on the change category designated by the change category command transmitted from the main substrate 11. Select the pending display mode decision table to be used from among the decision table, and add it to the first start prize storage display area 5HL based on the selected pending display mode decision table and the random value MR6 for the display mode decision of the pending display The display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the first hold display to be displayed is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode (additional display mode) of the first hold display to be additionally displayed determined in the first hold effect determination process in step S160 is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition. The first hold display displayed as the first hold information corresponding to the variable display is erased from the first start winning storage display area 5HL, and the specific display corresponding to the erased first hold display is displayed in the active display area AHA. It is assumed that the display mode of the first hold display does not change until That is, the first hold display displayed in the addition display mode is described as being displayed in the same display mode while being displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL.

  A display mode different from the display mode at the time of addition from the display mode at the time of addition with respect to the display mode at the time of the addition with respect to the first hold display displayed in the display mode at the time of addition The hold change effect or hold change change effect to change from the hold display of the red display mode to the red display mode), an effect that encourages (proposes) that the display mode of the first hold display changes, or the like may be executed.

  Further, in the determination process of determining the display mode of the first suspension display when additionally displaying in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the suspension display mode determination table of any of FIGS. 25 (A) to 25 (G) The start condition of the holding information corresponding to the first hold display displayed in the addition display mode is satisfied based on the addition display mode determined based on the first hold display and the display mode determination random value MR6 for the first hold display. The specific display corresponding to the variable display executed based on the above is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the timing when the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA is erased, and the erased specific display is redisplayed in the active display area AHA Whether to display or not, when displaying the deleted specific display in the active display area AHA, the timing for displaying the specific display, the active display area Executes processing to determine the display mode of the specific display when displaying the specific display on the HA with reference to the setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the specific display by the display mode determination table of the specific display as shown in FIG. Do. These processes will be described in detail with reference to a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the specific display by the display mode determination table of the specific display shown in FIG.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the specific display by the display mode determination table of the specific display. In the illustrated example, in the first hold display in which the display mode at the time of addition is determined with reference to FIG. Based on the display mode of the specific display when it is digested in the variable display (when the digestion order is the first) and displayed in the first start winning a prize storage display area 5HL, and the variation category Reference is made to determine the display mode of the display.

  For example, in the illustrated example, when the display mode of the first hold display immediately before the change is white and the special view display result is lost (non-reach), “the active display pattern is“ APW1-1 "or" APW1-2 "is selected. The active display pattern "APW1-1" is a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (white color) of the first hold display immediately before the change becomes the white specific display corresponding to the white first hold display. Active display area AHA displays at the start of the change, and then starts a predetermined timing, for example, the change, and then clears the specific display from the active display area AHA after a predetermined time elapses or immediately after the start of the change It is. That is, the active display pattern “APW 1-1” is a specific display in which the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA as the specific display corresponding to the change is erased and then changed from the display mode (white) of the specific display before the erase This is an active display pattern which is not displayed (redisplayed) in the display manner of display.

  Further, for example, the active display pattern “APW1-2” is a specification of white corresponding to the white hold display as a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (white) of the first hold display immediately before the change. The display is displayed in the active display area AHA at the start of the change, the predetermined timing thereafter, for example, the change is started, and the specific display is erased from the active display area AHA after a predetermined time elapses or immediately after the start of the change. The specific display of blue which is not the specific display of white corresponding to the first reserved display of white is displayed in the active display area AHA at a specific timing after the predetermined timing when the specific display of the white is erased, for example, before the reach. It is an active display pattern. That is, when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA changes as the specific display corresponding to the change, the active display pattern “APW1-2” erases the displayed specific display, and before the deletion The specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA in a display mode (second display mode) of the specific display different from the display mode (first display mode) of the specific display of.

  Also, for example, when the display mode of the first hold display immediately before the change is white and the special view display result is “reach”, “APW2−” is displayed as the active display pattern. One of "1", "APW2-2" and "APW2-3" is selected. The active display pattern "APW2-1" is a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (white color) of the first hold display immediately before the change, and the white specific display corresponding to the white first hold display Active display area AHA displays at the start of the change, and then starts a predetermined timing, for example, the change, and then clears the specific display from the active display area AHA after a predetermined time elapses or immediately after the start of the change It is. That is, the active display pattern "APW2-1" erases the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA as the specific display corresponding to the change, and then changes the display mode (white) of the specific display before the erasing. This is an active display pattern which is not displayed (redisplayed) in the display manner of display.

  In addition, for example, the active display pattern “APW2-2” is a white corresponding to the first hold display of white as a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (white) of the first hold display immediately before the change. Is displayed on the active display area AHA at the start of the fluctuation, and then the predetermined timing after that, for example, the fluctuation is started, and the specific display is erased from the active display area AHA after a predetermined time elapses or immediately after the start of the fluctuation. And the specific display of blue that is not the specific display of white corresponding to the first reserved display of white, to the specific display timing after the specific timing of the specific display of white, for example, the active display area AHA at the timing before reaching It is an active display pattern to be displayed. That is, when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA changes as the specific display corresponding to the change, the active display pattern “APW2-2” displays the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA. Active to display the specific display in the active display area AHA at the timing before reaching by the display mode (second display mode) of the specific display which is erased and different from the display mode (first display mode) of the specific display before erasure It is a display pattern.

  In addition, for example, the active display pattern “APW2-3” is a white color corresponding to the first hold display of white as a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (white color) of the first hold display immediately before the change. Is displayed on the active display area AHA at the start of the fluctuation, and then the predetermined timing after that, for example, the fluctuation is started, and the specific display is erased from the active display area AHA after a predetermined time elapses or immediately after the start of the fluctuation And the specific display of blue that is not the specific display of white corresponding to the first reserved display of white to the specific display timing after the specific timing of the specific display of white, for example, the active display area AHA at the timing after reaching It is an active display pattern to be displayed. That is, when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA changes as the specific display corresponding to the change, the active display pattern “APW2-3” is displayed in the active display area AHA. The specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA at the timing after reaching by the display mode (second display mode) of the specific display which is erased and different from the display mode (first display mode) of the specific display before the erasure. It is an active display pattern.

  Also, for example, when the display mode of the first hold display immediately before the change is white and the special view display result is a big hit, “APW 3-1”, “APW 3” as the active display pattern. -2 "or" APW3-3 "is selected. The active display pattern "APW3-1" is a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (white color) of the first hold display immediately before the change, and the white specific display corresponding to the white hold display is changed. The active display area AHA is displayed at the start of the predetermined display timing, for example, the active display pattern for starting the fluctuation and erasing the specific display from the active display area AHA after a predetermined time has elapsed or immediately after the start of the fluctuation . That is, the active display pattern “APW3-1” is the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA does not change as the specific display corresponding to the change. This is an active display pattern which is not displayed (redisplayed) in the display mode of the specific display which is erased and then changed from the display mode (white) of the specific display before the erasing.

  Further, for example, the active display pattern “APW3-2” is a white color corresponding to the first hold display of white as a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (white color) of the first hold display immediately before the change. Is displayed on the active display area AHA at the start of the fluctuation, and then the predetermined timing after that, for example, the fluctuation is started, and the specific display is erased from the active display area AHA after a predetermined time elapses or immediately after the start of the fluctuation. And the specific display of blue that is not the specific display of white corresponding to the first reserved display of white, to the specific display timing after the specific timing of the specific display of white, for example, the active display area AHA at the timing before reaching It is an active display pattern to be displayed. That is, when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA changes as the specific display corresponding to the change, the active display pattern “APW3-2” erases the displayed specific display, and before the deletion The display mode (second display mode) of the specific display different from the display mode (first display mode) of the specific display is an active display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA at the timing before reaching.

  Also, for example, the active display pattern “APW3-3” is a white color corresponding to the first hold display of white as a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (white color) of the first hold display immediately before the change. Is displayed on the active display area AHA at the start of the fluctuation, and then the predetermined timing after that, for example, the fluctuation is started, and the specific display is erased from the active display area AHA after a predetermined time elapses or immediately after the start of the fluctuation. And the specific display of blue that is not the specific display of white corresponding to the first reserved display of white to the specific display timing after the specific timing of the specific display of white, for example, the active display area AHA at the timing after reaching It is an active display pattern to be displayed. That is, when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA changes as the specific display corresponding to the change, the active display pattern “APW3-3” erases the displayed specific display, and before the deletion It is an active display pattern which displays a specific display in active display area AHA at the timing after reach by the display mode (the 2nd display mode) of the specific display different from the display mode (the 1st display mode) of the specific display of .

  For example, in the illustrated example, when the display mode of the first hold display immediately before the change is blue and the special view display result is lost (non-reach), “the active display pattern is“ APB1-1 "or" APB1-2 "is selected. The active display pattern "APB1-1" is a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (blue) of the first hold display immediately before the change becomes the blue specific display corresponding to the blue first hold display. Active display area AHA displays at the start of the change, and then starts a predetermined timing, for example, the change, and then clears the specific display from the active display area AHA after a predetermined time elapses or immediately after the start of the change It is. That is, when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA does not change as the specific display corresponding to the change, the active display pattern “APB1-1” displays the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA. This is an active display pattern which is not displayed (redisplayed) in the display mode of the specific display which is erased and then changed from the display mode (blue) of the specific display before the erasing.

  Further, for example, the active display pattern “APB1-2” is a blue identification corresponding to the blue suspension display as a display manner of the specific indicator corresponding to the display mode (blue) of the first suspension display immediately before the change. The display is displayed in the active display area AHA at the start of the change, the predetermined timing thereafter, for example, the change is started, and the specific display is erased from the active display area AHA after a predetermined time elapses or immediately after the start of the change. The specific display of yellow which is not the specific display of white corresponding to the first reserved display of blue is displayed in the active display area AHA at a specific timing after the predetermined timing when the specific display of the white is erased, for example, before reaching. It is an active display pattern. That is, when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA changes as the specific display corresponding to the change, the active display pattern “APB1-2” erases the displayed specific display, and before the deletion The specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA in a display mode (second display mode) of the specific display different from the display mode (first display mode) of the specific display of.

  Further, for example, when the display mode of the first hold display immediately before the change is blue and the special view display result is “reach”, “APB2−” is displayed as the active display pattern. One of “1”, “APB2-2”, and “APB2-3” is selected. The active display pattern "APB2-1" is a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (blue) of the first hold display immediately before the change becomes the blue specific display corresponding to the blue first hold display. Active display area AHA displays at the start of the change, and then starts a predetermined timing, for example, the change, and then clears the specific display from the active display area AHA after a predetermined time elapses or immediately after the start of the change It is. That is, when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA does not change as the specific display corresponding to the change, the active display pattern “APB2-1” displays the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA. This is an active display pattern which is not displayed (redisplayed) in the display mode of the specific display which is erased and then changed from the display mode (blue) of the specific display before the erasing.

  Further, for example, the active display pattern “APB2-2” is a blue corresponding to the blue first hold display as a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (blue) of the first hold display immediately before the change. Is displayed on the active display area AHA at the start of the fluctuation, and then the predetermined timing after that, for example, the fluctuation is started, and the specific display is erased from the active display area AHA after a predetermined time elapses or immediately after the start of the fluctuation. And the specific display of yellow that is not the specific display of white corresponding to the first reserved display of blue to a specific timing after the predetermined timing when the specific display of blue is erased, for example, the active display area AHA at the timing before reaching It is an active display pattern to be displayed. That is, when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA changes as the specific display corresponding to the change, the active display pattern “APB2-2” displays the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA. Active to display the specific display in the active display area AHA at the timing before reaching by the display mode (second display mode) of the specific display which is erased and different from the display mode (first display mode) of the specific display before erasure It is a display pattern.

  Further, for example, the active display pattern “APB2-3” is a blue color corresponding to the blue first hold display as a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (blue) of the first hold display immediately before the change. Is displayed on the active display area AHA at the start of the fluctuation, and then the predetermined timing after that, for example, the fluctuation is started, and the specific display is erased from the active display area AHA after a predetermined time has passed And the specific display of yellow that is not the specific display of blue corresponding to the first reserved display of blue to a specific timing after the predetermined timing when the specific display of blue is erased, for example, the active display area AHA at the timing after reaching It is an active display pattern to be displayed. That is, when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA changes as the specific display corresponding to the change, the active display pattern “APB2-3” displays the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA. The specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA at the timing after reaching by the display mode (second display mode) of the specific display which is erased and different from the display mode (first display mode) of the specific display before the erasure. It is an active display pattern.

  Also, for example, when the display mode of the first hold display immediately before the change is blue and the special view display result is a big hit, "APB3-1", "APB3" as the active display pattern. -2 "or" APB3-3 "is selected. The active display pattern "APB3-1" changes the blue specific display corresponding to the blue hold display as the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (blue) of the first hold display immediately before the change becomes the change. The active display area AHA is displayed at the start of the predetermined display timing, for example, the active display pattern for starting the fluctuation and erasing the specific display from the active display area AHA after a predetermined time has elapsed or immediately after the start of the fluctuation . That is, the active display pattern “APB3-1” is the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA does not change as the specific display corresponding to the change. This is an active display pattern which is not displayed (redisplayed) in the display mode of the specific display which is erased and then changed from the display mode (blue) of the specific display before the erasing.

  Also, for example, the active display pattern “APB3-2” is a blue corresponding to the blue first hold display as a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (blue) of the first hold display immediately before the change. Is displayed on the active display area AHA at the start of the fluctuation, and then the predetermined timing after that, for example, the fluctuation is started, and the specific display is erased from the active display area AHA after a predetermined time elapses or immediately after the start of the fluctuation. And the specific display of yellow which is not the specific display of blue corresponding to the first reserved display of blue to the specific display timing after the specific timing of the specific display of blue, for example, the active display area AHA at the timing before reaching It is an active display pattern to be displayed. That is, when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA changes as the specific display corresponding to the change, the active display pattern “APB3-2” erases the displayed specific display, and before the deletion The display mode (second display mode) of the specific display different from the display mode (first display mode) of the specific display is an active display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA at the timing before reaching.

Further, for example, the active display pattern “APB3-3” is a blue corresponding to the blue first hold display as a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (blue) of the first hold display immediately before the change. Is displayed on the active display area AHA at the start of the fluctuation, and then the predetermined timing after that, for example, the fluctuation is started, and the specific display is erased from the active display area AHA after a predetermined time elapses or immediately after the start of the fluctuation And the specific display of yellow that is not the specific display of blue corresponding to the first reserved display of blue to a specific timing after the predetermined timing when the specific display of blue is erased, for example, the active display area AHA at the timing after reaching It is an active display pattern to be displayed. That is, when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA changes as the specific display corresponding to the change, the active display pattern “APB3-3” erases the displayed specific display, and before the deletion It is an active display pattern which displays a specific display in active display area AHA at the timing after reach by the display mode (the 2nd display mode) of the specific display different from the display mode (the 1st display mode) of the specific display of .
The yellow and red active display patterns are the same as white and blue, so the description will be omitted.

  According to FIG. 26, the display category of the specific display is more likely to be changed in the change category (PA3 to PA5) of the change (reach) than the change category (PA1, PA2) of the change (non-reach) (first display The specification of the second display mode different from the specific display of the mode is easy to be displayed (redisplayed). In addition, the display mode of the specific display is likely to change at the first timing in the variation category (PA1, PA2) of loss (non-reach) and the variation category (PA3 to PA5) of variation (reach) (first display mode While the specification of the second display mode different from the specific display of is easy to be displayed (re-displayed), the display mode of the specific display is hard to change at the second timing (different from the specific display of the first display mode While the specification of the second display mode is difficult to be displayed (re-displayed), the display mode of the specific display does not easily change at the first timing in the variation category of the big hit (PB4, PB5) (first While the specification of the second display mode different from the specific display of the display mode is difficult to be displayed (re-displayed), the display mode of the specific display is easily changed at the second timing (specific display of the first display mode The second different from示態 like a particular has become display (re-display) are easy).

  Also, in the big hit variation category (PB4, PB5), the specific display at the second timing than the variation category (PA1, PA2) of out (non reach) or variation category (PA3 to PA5) of out (reach) Is easy to change (specification of the second display mode different from the specific display of the first display mode is easy to be displayed (redisplayed)), but the display mode of the specific display at the first timing Is difficult to change (specification of the second display mode different from the specific display of the first display mode is difficult to be displayed (redisplayed)).

  In addition, the first timing (for example, the timing before reaching) is easily selected when it is determined to be the display mode of the lower color such as white or blue, and the second timing (for example, reaching) after the first timing. In the later timing), it is easy to select when it is determined to be the display mode of the upper color such as yellow or red. That is, in the case of the variation category of "not reach" or the variation category of "reach", the display mode of the specific display is easily changed at the first timing (specific display of the first display mode and the like). Is easy to be displayed (re-displayed) the specification of the different second display mode, for example, the display mode of the blue specific display changed from the display mode of the white specific display is easily displayed), and the display of the yellow specific display The display mode of the specific display is more likely to change at the first timing than the display mode of the specific display of red from the mode (a second display different from the specific display of the first display mode) Although the specification of the mode is displayed (re-displayed), if it is a variation category of "big hit", the display mode of the specific display does not easily change at the first timing (specification of the first display mode) Different from display The display mode of the specific display is less likely to change at the first timing, and the display mode of the specific display is less likely to be changed than in the variation category of reach (reach). The specification of the second display mode different from the specific display of the display mode is difficult to be displayed (re-displayed).

  In addition, the second timing (for example, the timing after reaching) is easily selected when it is determined to be the display mode of the upper color such as yellow or red, and the variation category of “off (non reach)” or “off ( In the case of the variation category of "reach", the display mode of the specific display is hard to change at the second timing (specification of the second display mode different from the specific display of the first display mode is displayed (redisplayed) In particular, it is difficult to display the display mode of the red specific display changed from the display mode of the yellow specific display, for example, and the display mode of the yellow specific display becomes the display mode of the red specific display. Although the display mode of the display does not easily change at the first timing (the display of the second display mode different from the specific display of the first display mode is hard to be displayed (re-displayed)). "The big hit In the case of the variation category, the display mode of the specific display is easily changed at the second timing (specification of the second display mode different from the specific display of the first display mode is easily displayed (redisplayed)) Also, the display mode of the specific display is more likely to change at the second timing than the variation category of reach (reach) (specification of the second display mode different from the specific display of the first display mode) Is easy to be displayed (re-displayed).

  That is, in the case of the variation category of "not reach" or the variation category of "reach", it is difficult to change to the display mode of the specific display of the upper color, and the lower color is selected at the first timing. While it is easy to change to the display mode of the specific display, if it is a variation category that is "big hit", it is difficult to change to the display mode of the specific display of the upper color at the first timing, and the specific display of the lower color In the second timing, it is easy to change to the display mode of the specific display of the upper color, and it is difficult to change to the display mode of the specific display of the lower color, and in the second timing, It indicates that the credibility (expected degree) for becoming a big hit is high.

  That is, depending on which display mode of the hold display when displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA as the display of the corresponding specific display is displayed. After being erased, the ratio of whether or not to be displayed in the active display area AHA in a display manner of a specific display different from the display manner before erasure is different. Further, depending on which variation category corresponding to the hold display displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA as the specific display corresponding to the hold display is displayed. After being erased, the ratio of whether or not to be displayed in the active display area AHA in a display manner of a specific display different from the display manner before erasure is different.

  In addition, a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode at the time of addition of the suspension display shown in FIG. 25 and a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the specific display by the display mode determination table of the specific display shown in FIG. The display mode determination table and the display mode for the first hold display and the display mode for the specific display are determined based on the display mode determination table and the display mode determination random number MR6 for the first hold mode. [1] After the specific display corresponding to the variable display to be executed is displayed on the active display area AHA in the display mode of the specific display determined based on that the start condition of the hold information corresponding to the held display is satisfied, the active display area A process of determining the timing of erasing the specific display displayed on the AHA, a process of determining whether or not the erased specific display is redisplayed on the active display area AHA, It may be executed processing such as to determine the specific display of the display mode at the time of re-displaying the specific view on the revertive display area AHA.

  In addition, a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode at the time of addition of the suspension display shown in FIG. 25 and a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the specific display by the display mode determination table of the specific display shown in FIG. And a display mode of the first hold display and a display mode of the specific display, and a first hold display based on the display mode determination table and the display mode determination random number MR6 for the first hold display. The display mode of the first hold display from the time it is displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL in the display mode to the time it is displayed in the predetermined area in the display mode of the specific display is determined. The timing at which the display mode of the first hold display displayed in the display mode at the time of addition is displayed in the display mode of the first hold display different from the display mode at the time of addition based on the start condition of the corresponding hold information being satisfied A process of determining the timing for erasing the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA after displaying the specific display corresponding to the variable display to be executed or the specific display to be executed in the display mode of the specific display determined Or to execute processing for determining whether or not the deleted specific display is to be redisplayed in the active display area AHA, or processing for determining the display mode of the specific display when redisplaying the specific display in the active display area AHA You may

In the description of FIG. 26, the active display pattern is selected depending on which fluctuation category the fluctuation category is, and which display mode of the suspension display when displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H. For example, the active display pattern may be selected depending on which fluctuation pattern is in place of the fluctuation category, or the active display pattern may be selected based on the determination result of whether or not it is a big hit. It may be selected.
In addition, although description of FIG. 26 demonstrated an example which selects an active display pattern based on the determination result of whether it is a fluctuation category and which fluctuation category is a big hit, it becomes definite change control or not The active display pattern may be selected depending on whether or not the player is controlled in a state advantageous to the player, such as whether or not the time-saving control is to be performed. That is, depending on whether or not the player is controlled to a state advantageous to the player, the ratio in which the specific display is displayed in the second display mode in the predetermined area may be different.

  After executing the first hold effect determination process (step S160), the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the first hold effect determination process based on the determination result of the first hold effect determination process (step S161). . Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first hold, such as the display mode (display mode at the time of addition) or the display mode (active display pattern) of the specific display determined in the first hold effect determination process. The determination content in the effect determination process is stored in association with the buffer number of the first read advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning received command buffer 194A.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the on-hold change effect in the first on-hold effect determination process, and determines that the on-hold change effect is to be executed. The first start winning reception command buffer 194A corresponding to the execution timing in the case of executing the effect, the execution timing in the case of executing the suspension change case effect, the execution timing in the case of executing the suspension change (1) Information (for example, a flag) indicating that the pending presentation decision processing is to be executed (for example, a flag), information indicating that the pending presentation (for example, the pending presentation) is to be executed (for example, information Flag), information indicating that a pending change is to be performed (for example, a flag), and a pending effect as a pending display of the target. Information specifying the pending display to be changed (that is, the pending display due to the first start winning combination) (for example, the first prefetch notice corresponding to the buffer number of the first starting winning combination in the first start winning time reception command buffer 194A The buffer number of the buffer 194C) may be stored.

  In this case, for example, in the first holding effect determination process at the time of the first start winning combination of the first special figure holding memory number 3rd, the display mode "white" at the time of addition, holding effect "execution available (with hold change effect execution) If the execution timing is determined as “next change”, the effect control CPU 120 sets the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning receive command buffer 194A (for example, the buffer number “3”). Is stored in association with the buffer number (buffer number “3”) of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to “1” and stores the display mode “white” at the time of addition, and the first corresponding to the execution timing “next change” 1) The buffer number (buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number (buffer number "1") in the start winning reception command buffer 194A It may be stored and "1") information and buffer number '3' indicating running held change effect in association with the.

  When the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the hold change effect in the first hold effect determination process, the buffer in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A corresponding to the execution timing of the first hold effect determination process Only the information specifying the hold display of the target (the hold display by the first start winning combination) may be stored in association with the buffer number of the first pre-read advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the number (execution of hold change effect is executed It is not necessary to store information indicating that the user wants to).

  After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display mode of the hold display determined in the first hold effect determination process (step S160) (the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A) Adding a new hold display to the first start winning storage display area 5HL based on the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first read advance notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of Pending addition processing is executed (step S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first start winning storage display area 5HL to display a hold display according to the addition display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the above-described first read advance notice buffer 194C. By setting a control pattern as a usage pattern and transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like, the first hold effect is provided. A hold display according to the addition display mode determined in the determination process is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL. Then, the effect determination process at the time of winning is finished.

If it is determined in step S154 that the second starting opening winning combination designation command has been received (step S154; Yes), and it is specified that the time is short in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. Step S156: YES), the second holding effect determination process is executed (step S163). The second hold effect determination process includes a process of determining a display mode (also referred to as an additional display mode) of the hold display when the second start winning storage display area 5HR is additionally displayed.
In addition, in the case of executing hold change effect or hold change change effect on the hold display when additionally displaying in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, in the step, whether hold change effect or hold change case effect is executed A process of determining whether or not the process is performed, or a process of determining the execution timing of the hold effect when it is determined to execute the hold effect may be performed.

  In addition, each process of step S163, step S164, and step S165 which concerns on 2nd starting opening prize is the same as the process which concerns on each process of step S160, step S161, and step S162 which concerns on 1st starting opening winning, The “first” in each step can be read as the “second”, and the code can be read corresponding to the read, so the description will be omitted.

  If it is determined in step S152 that the first starting opening winning combination designation command has been received (step S152; Yes), and it is specified that the time is short in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. S155: YES), the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the first hold display to be additionally displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL to the initial color (white), the first start winning reception command buffer 194A The first hold display of the white display mode is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL in association with the same buffer number as the buffer number corresponding to the stored contents in (1) (step S166). Then, the effect determination process at the time of winning is finished.

  Further, it is determined that the second starting opening winning combination designation command is received in step S154 (step S154; Yes), and it is specified that the time saving is not performed in the process of step S513 in the command analysis process of FIG. (Step S156: YES), CPU 120 for effect control determines the display mode of the second hold display to be additionally displayed in the second start winning storage display area 5HR to the normal display (white ball), at the time of the second start winning The second hold display of the display mode of the normal display (white ball) is added to the second start winning storage display area 5HR in association with the same buffer number as the buffer number corresponding to the storage contents in the reception command buffer 194B. (Step S166). Then, the effect determination process at the time of winning is finished.

  As shown in FIG. 23, for example, in accordance with the value of the rendering process flag provided in the rendering control flag setting unit 191 or the like after executing the winning a prize determination processing of step S150 shown in FIG. 23 and FIG. One of the processes in the following steps S170 to S177 is selected and executed.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”, which is the initial value. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether or not the first variation start command (or the second variation start command), the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main substrate 11 are received It includes a process of determining whether or not variable display of the decorative symbol on the display device 5 is to be started. When it is determined that variable display of the decorative symbol is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process is a decorative symbol on image display device 5 in response to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special drawing game by first special symbol display device 4A or second special symbol display device 4B. Processing to determine the finalized decoration pattern according to the variation pattern of the special symbol and the type of display result, etc. in order to perform variable display of other various display operations, shift the first hold display or the second hold display, active A process of displaying a special image representing information corresponding to an active display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the display area AHA, a production mode of various performances or various performances (for example, active display which is a main preview production) The process of determining the change effect or the effect aspect of the active display change effect), or displaying, erasing or redisplaying the specific display on the active display area AHA It includes such process of setting the active display pattern including output. Thereafter, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "2".

  The variable display effect process of step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process, corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. The various control data are read out, and various effect control (for example, variable display control of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol) is performed. Specifically, based on the read control data, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a video signal (effect image) to the image display device 5 for display on the screen, and outputs an effect sound signal to the voice control board 13 Then, control of various effects such as control of outputting the effect sound from the speaker 8 and control of outputting the electric decoration signal to the lamp control board 14 to turn on / off / flash the lamp 9 is executed.

  After performing such effect control, for example, the end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol has been read out from the effect control pattern, or that the symbol determination command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received, etc. The finalized design is displayed as a final stop design, which is the result of variable display of the decoration design. If the finalized display is made to display the finalized decorative symbol in response to the end code being read out from the effect control pattern, when the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command has elapsed Even if the effect control command from the main substrate 11 is not used, the finalized display can be derived and displayed autonomously on the effect control substrate 12 side, and the variable display result can be determined. When the determined decoration pattern is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

  The process for waiting for a special figure in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." In the special-image-per-wait process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received. Then, when the hit start designating command designates the start of the big hit gaming state when the hit start designating command is received, the value of the presentation process flag is a value corresponding to the big hit during the presentation processing “6”. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the presentation process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect processing. Update to "4". Further, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "loss", and the value of the effect process flag is an initial value. Update to "0".

  The small hitting middle effect process of step S 174 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hitting medium effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, the effect control pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect in the small hit gaming state, reads various control data based on the setting contents, and the step S172 Similar to the variable-in-display effect processing, various effects control in the small hit gaming state is executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electric decoration signal, and the like. Further, in the small hitting medium effect processing, for example, in response to the reception of the hitting end designation command from the main substrate 11, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5" corresponding to the small hitting end effect. .

  The small hitting end effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., reads various control data based on the setting contents, and executes step S172. Similar to the variable-in-display effect processing, various effects control at the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by outputting video signals, effect sound signals, electric decoration signals and the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is an initial value.

  The jackpot inside effect process of step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit, during the effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern and the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, reads various control data based on the setting contents, and variably displays step S172. Similar to the middle effect processing, various effects control in the big hit gaming state is executed by outputting video signals, effect sound signals, electric decoration signals and the like. Further, in the big hit internal effect processing, for example, in response to the hit end designation command from the main substrate 11 being received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect process, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, etc., reads various control data based on the setting contents, and displays variable in step S172. Similar to the effect processing, various effects control at the end of the big hit gaming state is executed by outputting video signals, effect sound signals, electric decoration signals, etc. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is an initial value.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of FIG. 23 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 120 first reads, for example, the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main substrate 11, and the special view display result is "lost". It is determined whether or not (step S522). When it is determined that the special view display result is "loss" (step S522; Yes), for example, the fluctuation pattern designated by reading the EXT data in the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from main substrate 11 or the like. Is a non-reach variation pattern (that is, “PA1-1”, “PA2-1”, “PA2-2”, “PA2-3” in FIG. 5) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” It is determined whether there is any (step S523).

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is the non-reach variation pattern (step S523; Yes), the combination of the finalized design symbols to be the final stop design constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a left determined symbol determination random number value updated by a random counter or the like provided in effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the predetermined left fixed symbol determination table or the like, the left fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 in the fixed decorative symbols is determined.

  Next, numerical data representing a random number for determining a right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like By referring to and the like, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, numerical value data indicating a random number value for determining the middle fixed symbol which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. The determined fixed decoration symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 among the fixed decoration symbols is determined by referring to the symbol etc. In addition, in the process of step S524, in response to the case where the variation symbol advance is being executed, the determined decoration symbol of the non-reach combination to be the predetermined chance symbol may be determined.

  If it is determined in step S523 that the pattern is not the non-reach variation pattern (step S523; No), the combination of the finalized design symbols to be the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination is determined (step S525). As an example, in the process of step S525, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining left and right fixed symbols, which is updated by a random counter or the like provided in effect control counter setting unit 193, is extracted and stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the predetermined left and right fixed symbol determination table, etc., the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 in the fixed decorative symbol are aligned and stopped and displayed. The symbol number determines the same decorative symbol. Furthermore, numerical data representing a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol determined to be updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like By referring to the determined decoration pattern, the determined decoration pattern to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration pattern display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

  Here, for example, when the determined decoration pattern becomes a big hit combination, as in the case where the symbol number of the middle determined decoration symbol becomes identical to the symbol number of the left determined decoration symbol and the right determined decoration symbol, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, “1”) to the symbol number of the middle fixed decoration symbol, the fixed decoration symbol may be a reach combination without being a big hit combination. Alternatively, when the middle fixed decoration pattern is determined, the difference between the left fixed decoration pattern and the right fixed decoration pattern with the pattern number (pattern difference) may be determined, and the middle fixed decoration pattern corresponding to the design difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S522 that the special view display result is not "losing" (step S522; No), the special view display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probable", or the special view display It is determined whether the result is a "small hit" or a case other than these (step S526). When it is determined to be "probable" or "small hit" (step S526; Yes), for example, the final stop symbol corresponding to the case of "probable" or "small hit", such as an opening chance eye A combination of symbols is determined (step S527). In this case, numerical data representing a random number value for determining a chance eye updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined chance eye determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. The combination of the finalized decorative symbols constituting any of the opening chances may be determined by referring to and the like.

  When it is determined in step S526 that "non-probability" or "probability" other than "probable" or "small hit" (step S526; No), a finalized decorative symbol of the final stop design that constitutes the big hit combination A combination is determined (step S528). As an example, in the process of step S528, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a big hit determined to be updated by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like is extracted and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined big hit finalized symbol determination table, etc., it will be displayed in stop on the left, middle and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the screen of the image display 5 Decide on a decorative pattern with the same symbol number. At this time, depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probability" or "probability", or whether or not a promotion effect is made during the jackpot, etc., a decision is made to determine a different decoration pattern as the decoration pattern. Good.

  As a specific example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability", any one decorative pattern is selected from among a plurality of types of normal symbols, and it is decided to be a definite decorative pattern that constitutes a non-probable large hit combination. Just do it. In addition, when the jackpot type is "probable variation", any one decorative pattern is selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols or probable patterns, and a finalized decorative symbol forming a non-probable big hit combination or a positive variation big hit combination You can decide on At this time, when it is decided to the fixed decoration symbol of the non-probability variation big hit combination, the notification that it is controlled to the probability variation state in re-lottery production in the variable display is not done, it is executed corresponding to the big hit gaming state It should just be notified that it is controlled to a definite change state by a jackpot promotion promotion etc. On the other hand, when it is determined to the definite decoration symbol of the big hit combination, the notification that it is controlled to the positive change state is performed in the re-lottery production in the variable display or without performing the re-lottery production.

  After performing any of the processes of steps S524, S525, S527, and S528, the reserve digest process is performed (step S531). Specifically, the specific display corresponding to the change is displayed in the active display area AHA (in other words, the special image including the active display corresponding to the change is displayed). For example, when the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the first special figure game (when the variable display of the present decorative symbol is linked to the first special figure game), the first start winning memory display area A specific display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the 5HL is displayed on the active display area AHA (a special image including an active display corresponding to the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning storage display area 5HL ). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 erases the hold display displayed at the right end of the first start winning storage display area 5HL from the first start winning storage display area 5HL, and there is a hold display on the left side thereof. Sets the effect control pattern for causing the active display area AHA to display a specific display corresponding to the hold display erased from the first start winning storage display area 5HL as a usage pattern, and shifting those hold displays one by one. The hold displayed at the right end of the first start winning storage display area 5HL by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like The specific display corresponding to the display is displayed on the active display area AHA. The display mode of the specific display in the active display area AHA may be displayed in the same display mode as the hold display, or corresponds to the display mode of each hold display but is different from the display mode of the hold display It is also good.

  For example, the display mode of the specific display is the display mode of the white display corresponding to the display mode of the white display, or the display mode of the specific display of the white triangle corresponding to the white display of the white sphere. The same display mode as the display mode, and the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display, the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display, and the display mode of the hold display which are different from the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display. The display mode may be similar to the specific display corresponding to the hold display. The same is true when the variation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special drawing game.

  In addition, in the process of step S531, in the first start winning a prize storage display area 5HL, the effect control CPU 120 holds a reserve display in addition to the reserve display to be digested (pending display corresponding to the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA). When there is (other suspension display), the other suspension display is shifted in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, and in the second startup winning storage display area 5HR, in addition to the storage display to be stored, the suspension display (other When there is a pending display), the other pending display is shifted in the second start winning storage display area 5HR.

  After the process of step S531 is performed, an effect execution setting process is performed (step S532). The effect execution setting process is a process of determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect on a specific display corresponding to the change, a process of determining the type of active display change effect when executing an active display change effect, A process of determining an effect mode of an active display change effect when executing an active display change effect, a process of determining an execution timing of an active display change effect when performing an active display change effect, an effect based on the determination results The process of setting (or resetting) the control pattern, the erasing timing when changing the display mode of the specific display or the display mode of the specific display, the display mode of the specific display when redisplaying after erasing the specific display, or redisplaying A process of setting an active display pattern including timing and the like is included. Details will be described later.

  After the process of step S532, the execution setting of the effect during the other variable display is performed (step S533). As an example, in the process of step S533, execution setting of "one-shot notification effect" is performed to immediately notify (determinately notify) that the variable display result is "big hit" by the big hit notification sound or the big hit notification light emission May be An example of the big hit notification sound is an alarm sound, a chime sound, a siren sound, and the like. One example of the big hit notification light emission is light emission of a flash lamp which constitutes the light emitting member 9 CC. Further, in the process of step S533, regardless of whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", for example, effects may be set to be executed in a predetermined manner for bustling. For example, an effect may be set to be performed such that a predetermined lamp 9 (for example, the light emitting members 9SL and 9SR) emits light.

  After the process of step S533 is executed, for example, an initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command (step S534). ). Subsequently, the variable display etc. start setting process is carried out to make settings for starting the fluctuation of the decorative symbol etc. in the image display device 5 (step S535). For example, the display control instruction specified by the display control data, which is included in the effect control pattern set as the usage pattern in the effect execution setting process of step S532, is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like. The sound in the speaker 8 by transmitting to the sound control board 13 the setting for starting the variation of the decorative pattern on the screen of the device 5 or transmitting the effect sound signal designated by the sound control data included in the effect control pattern to the sound control board 13 Setting to start light emission in the lamp 9 by transmitting to the lamp control board 14 a setting for starting output and transmitting an electric decoration signal designated by the lamp control data included in the effect control pattern is performed. .

  After executing the process of step S535, the command stored in the first start winning combination reception command buffer 194A or the second start winning combination reception command buffer 194B is digested (step S536). Specifically, when the variable control of the decorative symbol is started interlockingly with the first special view game, the effect control CPU 120 is the most among the commands associated with the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smaller buffer number is deleted, and the command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command (first start opening winning combination specified The command associated with the command is shifted while maintaining the winning order.When variable display of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction with the second special figure game, it is stored in the second start winning reception command buffer. Delete the command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among The command stored in the area corresponding to the larger buffer number than the buffer number of the divided commands shifts while maintaining the winning order.

  Further, in the process of step S536, deletion or shift of information stored in the first read advance notice buffer 194C or the second read notice notice buffer 194D provided in the RAM 122 or the like is also performed according to the deletion or shift of the command. . Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the variable display effect process (step S537), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

Here, the effect execution setting process (step S532) will be described in detail. First, a process of determining whether or not to execute the active display change effect for the specific display corresponding to the change, and a process of determining the type of the active display change effect when it is determined to execute the active display change effect (which active A process of determining whether to execute the display change effect will be described.
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table.
In the setting example, whether or not to execute the active display change presentation, or the type of the active display change presentation (which active display change presentation is to be executed) It is a setting example.
In the active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table, numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random value MR7 (not shown) for determining the presence / absence of active display change presentation are “execution present” and “execution not present” Are assigned at the determination rates as shown in FIG. In addition, in the "present" of the active display change presentation execution presence / absence decision table, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number MR7 (not shown) for decision is "first system change presentation" and The second system change effect and the "first system change effect and the second system change effect" are allocated at determination rates as shown in FIG. Further, the first system change effect includes a plurality of effect modes having similar effect modes. The second system change effect includes a plurality of effect modes having similar effect modes. Specifically, the first system change effect is an effect acting on the display mode of the active display, and the second system change effect is an effect acting on the display mode of the active display frame, and the first system change effect The target acting on the second system change effect is different.

  In addition, "execution yes" "first system change production" indicates that the first system change production is performed as an active display change presentation, "execution yes" "second system change presentation" is the second system change production "Execute" and "1st system change effect and 2nd system change effect" represent the effect of performing as an active display change effect. Indicates that the effect is to be made. Also, "execution not performed" indicates that the active display change effect is not performed. Further, fluctuation pattern 1-X represents fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and fluctuation pattern PA2-X represents any of fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2 and PA2-3 shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern PA3-X represents one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 illustrated in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA4 represents the fluctuation pattern PA4-1, PA4-2, and PA4-3 illustrated in FIG. It represents any of PA4-4. The same applies to the variation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

  According to FIG. 28, when the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern) of the fluctuation (variable display pattern) designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern PA1-X or PA2-X, "not executed" is 100 %, Indicating that neither the first system change effect nor the second system change effect is executed. That is, when the said fluctuation | variation is non-reach (loss), it represents not performing an active display change presentation.

  When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern PB3-X, PB4-X, PB5-X, the fluctuation pattern PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X is used. The rate at which “no execution” is determined is lower than in some cases. That is, the rate at which the active display change effect is performed when the "big hit" occurs in the change is higher than the rate at which the active display change effect is performed when the "losing" occurs in the change. That is, when the active display change effect is executed, the expectation for being a "big hit" is higher than when the active display change effect is not executed.

  When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern PB3-X, PB4-X, or PB5-X, the fluctuation patterns are PA3-X, PA4-X, PA5-X. Compared to the case, the ratio at which the "first system change effect and the second system change effect" are determined when "execution" is determined is higher. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PB3-X, the ratio at which the "first system change rendition and the second system change rendition" are determined when "performed" is determined is about 57% (40/70). On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern PA3-X, the ratio at which the “first system change effect and the second system change effect” are determined when “execution yes” is determined is about 33% (10 × 30) It is. Or, more specifically, whether the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is any of fluctuation patterns PA3-X to PA5-X or which of fluctuation patterns PB3-X to PB5-X The difference (or ratio) of the rate at which the “first system change rendition and the second system change rendition” are determined is the change pattern of the change designated by the change pattern designation command, the change pattern of the change pattern PA3-X to PA5- It is larger than the difference of the ratio in which the "first system change rendition" or the "second system change rendition" is determined depending on which X is any of the fluctuation patterns PB3-X to PB5-X. For example, when it is fluctuation pattern PB3-X, the proportion at which "first system change effect and second system change effect" are determined and when it is fluctuation pattern PA3-X, "first system change effect and second system change" While the difference with the rate at which the effect is determined is 30% (40% to 10%), the rate at which the “first system change effect” is determined in the case of the change pattern PB3-X and the change pattern When it is PA3-X, the difference from the rate at which the "first system change rendition" is determined is 5% (15% to 10%). That is, when the first system change rendition and the second system change rendition are performed, the degree of expectation of being a "big hit" is higher than when not.

  When the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern PA4-X, PA5-X, PB4-X, or PB5-X, the fluctuation patterns are PA3-X, PB3-X. Compared to the case, the rate at which "no execution" is determined is lower. That is, the rate at which the active display change effect is executed when becoming the super reach in the change is higher than the rate at which the active display change effect is performed when the normal reach is in the change. That is, when the active display change presentation is performed, the degree of expectation of becoming the super reach is higher than when the active display change presentation is not performed.

  Similarly, when the first system change rendition and the second system change rendition are performed, the degree of expectation of becoming a super reach is higher than when not.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 is specified by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, the random value MR7 for determining the active display change effect execution presence / absence, and the fluctuation pattern specification command Whether to execute the active display change effect or not by performing the change pattern (variable display pattern) of the change (the variable display), and when performing the active display change effect, the effect mode of the plurality of active display change effects Of these, it is determined which active display change presentation is to be performed.

  In addition, CPU120 for production control first decides execution presence or absence of active indication change production, when it decides with “execution yes” “first system change presentation” or “second system change presentation” or “first system change presentation” And “the second system change effect” may be determined.

Next, in the case of the specific display (variation) for executing the active display change presentation, processing for determining the presentation mode of the active display change presentation to be performed will be described.
FIG. 29A is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination ratio of the effect mode of the first system change effect when the first system change effect is executed as the active display change effect. FIG. 29B is a diagram showing a setting example of the determination ratio of the effect mode of the second system change effect when executing the second system change effect as the active display change effect. Further, FIG. 29C shows the determination ratio of the first system change effect and the second system change effect when the first system change effect and the second system change effect are both executed as the active display change effect. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting.

  In the illustrated example, fluctuation pattern 1-X represents fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and fluctuation pattern PA2-X represents any of fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2 and PA2-3 shown in FIG. The variation pattern PA3-X represents one of the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 shown in FIG. 5, and the variation pattern PA4 represents the variation pattern PA4-1, PA4-2 and PA4 shown in FIG. -3, represents any of PA4-4. The same applies to the variation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

  It is assumed that the ROM 121 stores an active display change effect pattern as an effect aspect of four types of first system change effects according to the 24 types of fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 5. In addition, it is assumed that the ROM 21 stores active display change effect patterns as effect modes of three types of second system change effects according to the 24 types of fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 5. In addition, the ROM 21 stores active display change effect patterns as effect modes of 12 types of first system change effects and second system change effects corresponding to the 24 types of fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 5. Do.

The first system change effect is an effect effect concerning the change of the display mode of the specific display for the specific display, and for example, an effect effect concerning the change of the display shape of the specific display.
In FIG. 29A, assuming that the display shape of the specific display corresponding to the change is "sphere" as the default, the active display change effect pattern "BP1" has the display shape of the specific display of "ball". It is an effect pattern of failure effect (active display change false effect effect) which is not changed as it is. According to the illustrated example, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when it is the hot reach (for example, super reach). In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is “lost” (for example, fluctuation pattern PA3-1), the determination ratio is higher than the fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PB3-1) which is “big hit”.

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern "BP2" is an effect of success effect that changes the display shape of the specific display corresponding to the change from the default display shape "sphere" to the display shape of the specific display of "triangle". It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA4-1), the determination ratio is smaller than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PB4-1) that is “big hit”. It's getting higher. Also, when it is a hot reach (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when it is a non-hot reach (for example, normal reach).

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern "BP3" is an effect of success effect that changes the display shape of the specific display corresponding to the change from the default display shape "sphere" to the display shape of the "pentagonal" specific display. It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is "big hit" (for example, variation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is smaller than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) that is "lost". It's getting higher. Also, when it is a hot reach (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when it is a non-hot reach (for example, normal reach).

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern "BP4" is an effect of a successful effect that changes the display shape of the specific display corresponding to the change from the default display shape "sphere" to the display shape of the specific display of "star". It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the hot reach (for example, super reach) is made, the determination ratio is higher than when the hot reach (for example, normal reach) is obtained. In addition, when the variation pattern is “big hit” (for example, variation pattern PB5-1), the determination ratio is higher than that of the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA5-1) for which “losing” occurs.

The second system change effect is an effect effect that changes the display mode of the active display frame for the active display frame, for example, an effect effect that changes the thickness of the line of the active display frame.
In FIG. 29B, assuming that the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the specific display corresponding to the change is "normal" as the default for the active display change effect pattern "CP1", the active display frame It is a rendering pattern of failure rendering (active display change cassette rendering) in which the thickness of the line of “normal” is not changed. According to the illustrated example, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when it is the hot reach (for example, super reach). In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is “lost” (for example, fluctuation pattern PA3-1), the determination ratio is higher than the fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PB3-1) which is “big hit”.

  Further, the active display change effect pattern “CP2” is a effect pattern of success effect that changes the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the specific display from “normal” to “medium-thick”. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA4-1), the determination ratio is smaller than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PB4-1) that is “big hit”. It's getting higher. Also, when it is a hot reach (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when it is a non-hot reach (for example, normal reach).

  The active display change effect pattern "CP3" is a effect pattern of success effect that changes the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the specific display corresponding to the change from "normal" to "very thick". According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is "big hit" (for example, variation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is smaller than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) that is "lost". It's getting higher. Also, when it is a hot reach (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when it is a non-hot reach (for example, normal reach).

The 1st system change production and the 2nd system change production are the active display which encloses the specific display by the above-mentioned 1st system change production, the operation production which beats the change of the display mode of the specific display, and the above 2nd system change production. It is an operation presentation which performs both of the operation presentation which asks about the change of the display mode of a frame.
In FIG. 29C, the active display change effect pattern “AP1” has, as a default, a “sphere” as the display shape of the specific display corresponding to the change, and the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the specific display. Assuming that the "normal" is the display shape of the specific display remains "sphere" and the thickness of the line of the active display frame does not change "normal" but the effect of the failure effect (active display change cassette effect) It is a pattern. According to the illustrated example, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when it is the hot reach (for example, super reach). In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is “lost” (for example, fluctuation pattern PA3-1), the determination ratio is higher than the fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PB3-1) which is “big hit”.

  In the active display change effect pattern “AP2”, the display shape of the specific display remains “sphere”, and the line thickness of the active display frame surrounding the specific display is changed successfully from “normal” to “medium-thick” It is a production pattern of production. According to the illustrated example, when the variation pattern is “lost” (for example, variation pattern PA4-1), the determination ratio is smaller than the variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PB4-1) that is “big hit”. It's getting higher. Also, when the reach is not hot (for example, normal reach), the determination ratio is higher than when it is the heat reach (for example, super reach).

  Also, the active display change effect pattern "AP3" is a success effect that changes the thickness of the line of the active display frame surrounding the specific display from "normal" to "very thick" with the display shape of the specific display being "sphere". It is an effect pattern of. When the fluctuation pattern is "big hit" (for example, fluctuation pattern PB3-1), the determination ratio is higher than that of the fluctuation pattern (for example, fluctuation pattern PA3-1) which is "lost". Also, when it is a hot reach (for example, super reach), the determination ratio is higher than when it is a non-hot reach (for example, normal reach).

  The active display change effect pattern "AP4" is a effect pattern of the effect mode in which the display shape of the specific display is changed to "triangle" and the thickness of the line of the active display frame is not changed as "normal". The effect pattern "AP5" is an effect pattern of effect mode in which the display shape of the specific display is changed to "triangle" and the thickness of the line of the active display frame is changed to "middle thick". AP6 ′ ′ is an effect pattern of an effect aspect in which the display shape of the specific display is changed to “triangle”, and the line thickness of the active display frame is changed to “very thick”.

  In addition, the active display change effect pattern "AP7" is a effect pattern of the effect aspect that changes the display shape of the specific display to "pentagon" and does not change the thickness of the line of the active display frame as "normal". The display change effect pattern "AP8" is a effect pattern of a effect mode in which the display shape of the specific display is changed to "pentagon" and the thickness of the line of the active display frame is changed to "medium thick". The pattern “AP9” is an effect pattern of an effect mode in which the display shape of the specific display is changed to “pentagon” and the thickness of the line of the active display frame is changed to “very thick”.

  Further, the active display change effect pattern "AP10" is a effect pattern of the effect aspect that changes the display shape of the specific display to "stars" and does not change the thickness of the lines of the active display frame as "normal". The display change effect pattern "AP11" is a effect pattern of a effect mode in which the display shape of the specific display is changed to "stars" and the thickness of the line of the active display frame is changed to "middle thick". The pattern “AP12” is an effect pattern of an effect aspect in which the display shape of the specific display is changed to “stars” and the thickness of the line of the active display frame is changed to “very thick”.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 sets the random value MR8 for determining the active display change effect pattern and the fluctuation pattern (the variable display) designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command Based on the variable display pattern, the active display change effect pattern is determined as an effect mode of the active display change effect when the active display change effect is executed.

Next, about the process which determines the timing which performs active display change presentation in the said fluctuation | variation, 30 is a figure which shows the example of a setting of the determination ratio by the presentation execution timing determination table at the time of 1st system change presentation execution.
Note that the execution timings of a plurality (for example, four) of first system change effects are stored in the ROM 121 according to the 24 variation patterns shown in FIG. 5 as the effect execution timings of the first system change effects. I assume.
The timing 1 is, for example, a timing at which the first system change effect is executed at the start of the fluctuation of the fluctuation, the timing 2 is a timing at which the first system change effect is performed at the time of the pseudo link fluctuation, and the timing 3 is It is a timing which performs the 1st system change production at the time of reach establishment in the change concerned, and timing 4 is a timing which performs the 1st system change production after the reach establishment (during reach) in the change concerned. The pseudo continuous change time is, for example, a time when the variable display during change is temporarily stopped.

  In addition, fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 classified as "success expectation degree" small "" indicate that the expectation degree at which the success effect is executed is "small", and "success expectation degree" medium " In the fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4 and PA5-1 to PA5-4 classified into “4”, the expectation for executing the success effect is “medium” higher than the above-mentioned success expectation “small”. Represents In addition, the fluctuation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 classified as "Successful Expectation" Large "have the" Large "higher expectation than the success expectation" Medium "for which the success effect is executed. In the fluctuation patterns PB4-1 to PB4-4 and PB5-1 to PB5-4 classified as “success expectation degree“ maximum ””, the expectation degree at which the success effect is executed is the above-mentioned success expectation degree “large”. Represents a higher than "maximum".

  Specifically, in FIG. 28, the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 are an active display change effect pattern BP1 which is a failure effect of the first system change effect, and an active display which is a failure effect of the second system change effect. The ratio determined as the change display pattern CP1 or the active display change presentation pattern AP1 which is a failure presentation of the first system change production and the second system change production is compared with the ratio determined as the other active display change presentation patterns It is high, the degree of success expectation for which the success presentation can be performed is low, and as described above, it is classified as "the degree of success expectation" small ".

  Further, in FIG. 28, fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-4 other than the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2, PA5-1 to PA5-4, PB3-1 to PB3-2, and PB4-1 to PB4-4. , PB5-1 to PA5-4, active display change effect patterns BP2 to BP4 which are successful effects of the first system change effect, active display change effect patterns CP2 to CP3 which are successful effects of the second system change effect, The ratio determined for active display change effect patterns AP2 to AP12, which is a successful effect of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, is higher than the ratio determined for the other active display change effect patterns. The success expectation degree with which the successful presentation can be performed is higher than that of the variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2. That is, due to the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 28, the degree of expectation that the success effect can be performed is high.

In the example shown in the figure, the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern) of the fluctuation (variable display pattern) designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is not a pseudo continuous fluctuation, fluctuation patterns PA3-1, PA4-1, PA4-2, PA5 -1, PA5-2, PB3-1, PB4-1, PB4-2, PB5-1, and PB5-2 indicate that the first system change effect is not executed at timing 2.
According to FIG. 29, when it comes to hot reach (for example, super reach), the determination ratio determined at an earlier timing (for example, timing 1) is higher than when it is for a non-hot reach (for example, normal reach). ing. Also, in the case of the "big hit" variation pattern, the determination ratio determined at the later timing (for example, timing 4) of the first system change effect is higher than that of the "losing" variation pattern. . Moreover, after reach establishment (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the expectation degree of the successful rendering is higher than before reach establishment (for example, timing 1 and timing 2). In addition, after temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (for example, timing 3 and timing 4), the expectation of the success effect is higher than before temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (for example, timing 1) There is.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 changes the random value MR9 for determining the item timing of the active display change effect and the fluctuation (the variable display) designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command The execution timing of the active display change effect in the case of executing the active display change effect is determined by the pattern (variable display pattern).

  At timing 2, immediately after the start of the revariable display, for example, at the start of the first revariable display or at the start of the second revariable display, depending on the number of times of temporary stop of the variable display in the pseudo continuous change. May be determined as the execution timing of the first system change rendition, or the execution timing of the first system change rendition may be determined at a plurality of times of execution timing in a plurality of times of pseudo continuous fluctuation. In addition, timing 2 at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation may be after reach establishment, for example, execution timing is set to set timing 2 at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation after timing 3 at the time of reach establishment in FIG. A plurality of timings including four timings may be set as the execution timing of the first system change effect.

Moreover, when the first system change effect is executed as the active display change effect shown in FIG. 29, the setting example of the determination ratio of the effect mode of the first system change effect and the execution timing of the first system change effect shown in FIG. And the ROM 121 may be stored as one table in association with each other.
The same applies to the execution timing of the second system change rendition and the execution timing for executing both the first system change rendition and the second system change rendition.

  In addition, a setting example (not shown) of the determination ratio by the execution timing determination table of the second system change presentation is a setting example of the determination ratio by the presentation execution timing determination table at the time of the first system change presentation execution as shown in FIG. It may be the same, or it may be a setting example of the determination ratio by the execution timing determination table of the second system change presentation different from the setting example of the determination ratio by the presentation execution timing determination table at the time of the first system change presentation execution. Good.

  In addition, when it is determined in FIG. 28 that "the first system change effect and the second system change effect" are to be executed, the execution timing of the first system change effect and the second system change effect is as shown in FIG. Using the setting example of the determination ratio by the execution timing determination table, the first system change effect and the second system change effect may be collectively determined to be performed at the same timing, or the first system change effect and the first system change effect The respective execution timings of the two system change effects may be determined collectively so that they may be different execution timings. Also, when it is determined in FIG. 28 that "first system change effect and second system change effect" are to be executed, the execution timings of the first system change effect and the second system change effect are as shown in FIG. The execution timings of the first system change presentation and the second system change presentation may be separately determined using the setting example of the determination ratio based on the presentation execution timing determination table.

  Next, a process of setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change effect will be described.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs the presence or absence of execution of the active display change effect determined based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command transmitted from the main substrate 11, and when performing the active display change effect, the active display change The effect pattern of the effect and the execution timing of the active display change effect are set as the effect control pattern. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command as an effect control pattern, and an effect corresponding to the effect mode of the selected active display change effect. The pattern is set as an effect control pattern. In addition, when two or more presentation control patterns corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command are prepared, either is selected and it sets as a production control pattern.

  Next, an active display pattern including the display mode of the specific display and the display mode of the specific display at the time of changing the display mode of the specific display and the display mode of the specific display at the time of redisplaying after erasing the specific display is set. The process will be described.

  The effect control CPU 120 performs the variation category designated by the variation category command transmitted from the main board 11 in the first holding effect determination process of step S160 of FIG. 24 or the second holding effect determination process of step S163 of FIG. By selecting the hold display mode decision table to be used from among the plurality of hold display mode decision tables shown in FIG. 25 based on the change category designated by the change category command, the selected hold display mode decision table and the hold display Based on the display mode (display mode at the time of addition) when the first hold display is displayed at the time of addition in the first start winning a prize storage display area 5HL determined based on the random number value MR6 for display mode determination The first hold effect determination process of step S160 of 24 or the second hold effect determination process of step S163 of FIG. Set as effect control pattern presentation control pattern corresponding to one of the active display pattern of a plurality of active display pattern shown in FIG. 26 determined in ends demonstration execution setting processing (step S532).

  Next, a specific example of control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  On the main substrate 11 side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the CPU 103 updates the first pending storage number when the first start condition is met, and the CPU 103 holds the second pending storage number when the second start condition is met. Are updated (step S215). The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special view display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the variation category (step S217). The CPU 103 determines the special view display result using the random number value MR1 for determining the special view display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the like (steps S403 and S404). The CPU 103 determines the variation category based on the special map display result which is the determination result, the number of pending storages updated in step S215, and the random value MR3 for variation category determination extracted in step S217 (step S412) . The CPU 103 that has determined the variation category sets transmission of a variation category command specifying a variation category that is a determination result (step S413), and executes command control processing (step S17). As a result, a variation category command or the like specifying the variation category determined in step S412 is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12.

  Further, on the main substrate 11 side, when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 first determines the variation category extracted in step S217 in the variation pattern setting process (step S111) While not using the random value MR3, the random value MR3 for determining the variation category is extracted again, and the numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern is extracted. Subsequently, the CPU 103 determines a fluctuation pattern based on numerical data indicating the newly extracted random number value MR3 for fluctuation category determination and numerical data indicating the random pattern value MR5 for fluctuation pattern determination. The CPU 103 which has determined the fluctuation pattern sets transmission of a fluctuation pattern designation command which designates the fluctuation pattern which is the determination result, and executes a command control process (step S17). As a result, a fluctuation pattern designation command or the like for specifying the fluctuation pattern determined in step S111 is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12.

  On the side of the effect control board 12 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the first start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first start winning memory in the hold effect determination process (the first hold effect determination process of step S160). The display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display to be displayed on the display area 5HL is determined. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display to be displayed in the second start winning storage display area 5HR in the hold effect determination process (the second hold effect determination process of step S163). . In addition, the effect control CPU 120, in the holding effect determination process (the first holding effect determination process in step S160), the specific display corresponding to the change when the first hold display for which the display mode at the time of addition is determined becomes the variation The display mode of the specific display when displaying in the active display area AHA is determined. In addition, the effect control CPU 120, in the holding effect determination process (the second holding effect determination process in step S163), the specific display corresponding to the change when the second hold display for which the display mode at the time of addition is determined becomes the variation The display mode of the specific display when displaying in the active display area AHA is determined.

Further, based on the determination result of the first holding effect determination process in step S160, the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content (for example, the display mode at the time of addition, etc.) of the holding effect determination process in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C. At the same time (step S161), the first hold display is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL based on the stored contents (display mode upon addition) (step S162).
Further, based on the determination result of the second holding effect determination process in step S163, the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content (for example, the display mode at the time of addition, etc.) of the holding effect determination process in the second prefetch notice buffer 194D. At the same time (step S164), the second hold display is added to the second start winning storage display area 5HR based on the stored contents (display mode upon addition) (step S165).

  In addition, on the side of the effect control board 12, when the first start condition is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the first pre-read advance notice buffer 194C or the second pre-read notice buffer 194D, and the main variable display Based on the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the substrate 11, the effect control pattern is set.

  31A, 31 B, and 31 C are diagrams showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (c) in FIG. 31A, (d) to (e) in FIG. 31B (A), (d) to (f) in FIG. 31B (B), and (d) in FIG. In (e) to (e), the respective scenes in the image display device 5 are arranged in time series. In each of FIGS. 31A, 31B, and 31C, an arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative symbol is changing.

In (a) of FIG. 31A, an active display frame AHW is displayed in the active display area AHA, and a hold display H1, a hold display H2, a hold display H3, and a hold display H4 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. It is a scene. In the active display frame AHW displayed in the predetermined active display area AHA, when the variable display is started, the active display corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed.
Here, the active display area AHA is provided, for example, at the lower center of the image display device 5. The active display area AHA is capable of displaying at least an active display, and includes an active display frame AHW surrounding the active display and a predetermined range including the active display frame AHW in addition to the active display. It is also possible to display characters and images in the active display area AHA, such as the active display itself or the inside or outside of the active display frame AHW.

  In addition, immediately before the active display is displayed in the active display area AHA, it is determined at the start winning prize of the hold display H1 as effect contents corresponding to the hold display H1 in the buffer number “1” of the first preread notice buffer 194C. The display mode (display mode "blue" at the time of addition) of the hold display H1 is stored, and the buffer number "2" of the first read advance notice buffer 194C is the content of the hold display H2 as effect contents corresponding to the hold display H2. The display mode (display mode "white" at the time of addition) of the hold display H2 determined at the start winning combination is stored, and the buffer number "3" of the first read advance notice buffer 194C corresponds to the hold content corresponding to the hold display H3. The display mode (display mode at the time of addition "white") of the hold display H3 determined at the start winning combination of the hold display H3 is stored, and the first read advance notice buffer 1 The display mode (display mode "white" at the time of addition) of the hold display H4 determined at the start winning combination of the hold display H4 is stored in buffer number "4" of 4C as effect contents corresponding to the hold display H4. It shall be.

  The scene of (a) of FIG. 31A is a scene in which the decorative symbols (“3”, “9” and “4”) of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are stopped and displayed in the variable display corresponding to the hold display H0. is there.

In the scene of FIG. 31A (b) after (a) of FIG. 31A, when the variable display corresponding to the suspension display H1 displayed in the first start winning a prize storage display area 5HL is started, the effect control CPU 120 This is an example when the variation of the decorative pattern is started based on the variation pattern "PA3-1 (reach (loss))" designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11. For example, in the scene (b) of FIG. 31A, the specific display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 is a scene displayed in the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display H1 in the active display area AHA. For example, assuming that the hold display H1 is displayed in the blue display mode in the scene of FIG. 31A (a), the specific display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 is the hold display H1 in the scene of FIG. 31A (b). In the display mode (first display mode) of the blue specific display, the display mode is displayed in the active display area AHA as a display mode corresponding to the display mode of.
Moreover, in the scene of (b) of FIG. 31A, the hold display H1 is erased from the first start winning a prize storage display area 5HL, and other hold displays other than the hold display H1 (hold display H2, hold display H3, hold display H4) Are displayed shifted to the right (active display area AHA side).

  The scene of (c) of FIG. 31A after (b) of FIG. 31A is in the process of fluctuating corresponding to the specific display AH corresponding to the suspension display H1 started in the scene of (b) of FIG. 31A. The specific display AH displayed in the active display area AHA in the scene of (b) is erased from the active display area AHA at a predetermined timing, for example, a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the specific display AH It is a scene.

  The scene of (d) of FIG. 31B (A) after the scene of (c) of FIG. 31A is a scene where the decorative symbol "7" of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol display area 5R is displayed in reach mode. is there. At this time, the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5C is in the process of change. Also, in the scene of (d) of FIG. 31B (A), the specific display AH erased from the active display area AHA in the scene of (c) of FIG. Even at the displayed timing, it remains erased.

  The scene in (e) of FIG. 31B (A) after (d) in FIG. 31B (A) is the decorative pattern displayed in a reach manner in the decorative pattern display area 5 in the scene of (d) in FIG. 31B (A) The display mode of the specific display AH displayed in the active display area AHA in the scene of FIG. 31A at the timing (specific timing) after being displayed (display mode of the blue specific display (first display mode) ) Is a scene in which the specific display AH is redisplayed in the active display area AHA in a display mode different from the display mode, for example, a display mode (second display mode) of the yellow specific display.

  When the specific display AH is displayed in the active display area AHA in the first display mode or the second display mode in the scene (e) of FIG. 31B (A), the specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA. For example, an effect similar to or different from the effect mode such as an active display change effect or a specific display change effect may be performed.

  On the other hand, the scene of (d) of FIG. 31B (B) after (c) of FIG. 31A is similar to the scene of (d) of FIG. 31B (A), the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol display area 5R. The decorative design "7" of is a scene where it is displayed in reach mode. At this time, the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5C is in the process of change. Further, in the scene of (d) of FIG. 31B (B), the specific display AH erased from the active display area AHA in the scene of (c) of FIG. 31A is a decorative pattern in the reach mode in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R. Even at the displayed timing, it remains erased.

  The scene of (e) of FIG. 31B (B) after (d) of FIG. 31B (B) is a decorative pattern in a reach manner to the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the scene of (d) of FIG. 31B (B) The display mode (the display mode (the first display of the blue specific display) of the specific display AH displayed in the active display area AHA in the scene of FIG. 31A at the timing (specific timing) after the is displayed Mode) is a scene in which the specific display AH is redisplayed in the active display area AHA in the same display mode (first display mode).

  After the scene of (e) of FIG. 31B (B), the specific display AH for the specific display AH displayed in the active display area AHA in the first display mode in the scene of (e) of FIG. 31B. A change effect acting on the specific display AH of the first display mode such as an active display change effect or a specific display change effect for changing the display mode is executed. In addition, not only effects that act on the specific display AH such as active display change effects that change the display mode of the specific display AH or specific display change effects, but also active display change effects, specific display change effects, etc. There is also a case where the display mode of the specific display changes without being displayed.

  The scene of (f) in FIG. 31B (B) after performing change presentation such as active display change presentation and specific display change presentation on the specific display AH of the first display mode displayed in the active display area AHA is As a result of the effect, the specific display AH in the active display area AHA is a display mode in which the display mode of the specific display is different from the first display mode, for example, the display mode of the yellow specific display (the second display mode) It is the displayed scene.

  On the other hand, the scene of (d) of FIG. 31C (C) after (c) of FIG. 31A is the same as the scene of (d) of FIG. 31B (A) or the scene of (d) of FIG. The decorative symbol "7" of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol display area 5R is a scene displayed in the reach mode. At this time, the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5C is in the process of change. Further, in the scene of (d) of FIG. 31C (C), the specific display AH erased from the active display area AHA in the scene of (c) of FIG. It is in the state of being erased at the same time.

  The scene of (e) of FIG. 31C (C) after (d) of FIG. 31C (C) is a decorative pattern in a reach manner to the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the scene of (d) of FIG. 31C (C) After the is displayed, the decorative symbol "6" in the decorative symbol display area 5C is stopped, and the decorative symbols "7", "6" and "7" are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. At this time, in the active display area AHA, at the timing when the specific display AH erased from the active display area AHA in the scene of (c) of FIG. 31A is the stop display of the decorative symbols of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Also in the scene of FIG. 31A (b), and from the specific display of the first display mode displayed in the active display area AHA to the second display mode different from the first display mode and Since it does not occur, the specific display is not redisplayed in any display mode.

  Thus, according to FIG. 31A, FIG. 31B, and FIG. 31C, the specific display of the first display mode is erased at a predetermined timing, and when the display mode of the specific display changes, the specific display after the predetermined timing is performed at a specific timing. The specific display of the second display mode different from the display mode of 1 is displayed (redisplayed) in the active display area AHA, and when the display mode of the specific display does not change from the first display mode, the specific display is erased at a predetermined timing. Since the specific display is not displayed (re-displayed) in the active display area AHA after the game is performed, it is possible to easily recognize that the display mode of the specific display has changed (changed), and the player's interest can be improved. it can.

  In the display operation example in the image display device 5 shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, after the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach pattern in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, it is deleted after being displayed in the active display area AHA. Although the example which displays the specific display of the 2nd display mode which is a display mode different from the specific display of the 1st display mode was displayed on active display area AHA, the decorative symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display area in reach mode The specific display of the second display mode may be displayed in the active display area AHA at a timing before the display.

  In the display operation example in the image display device 5 shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, after the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach pattern in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, it is deleted after being displayed in the active display area AHA. Although the example which displays the specific display of the 2nd display mode which is a display mode different from the specific display of the 1st display mode in active display area AHA was explained, also to the change of the non reach which does not become a reach mode The specific display of the second display mode may be displayed in the active display area AHA at a timing after the decorative pattern to be reached is displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R.

  In the display operation example in the image display device 5 shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, after the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach pattern in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, it is deleted after being displayed in the active display area AHA. Although the example which displays the specific display of the 2nd display mode which is a display mode different from the specific display of the 1st display mode in active display area AHA was explained, in the mode which becomes non reach which a decorative design does not become a reach mode. The specific display of the second display mode may be displayed in the active display area AHA at a timing before the decorative pattern is displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (c) in FIG. 32 show the respective scenes in the image display device 5 arranged in time series. In each of the scenes in FIG. 32, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. For example, each scene of FIG. 32 is performed after the scenes of (a) to (c) of FIG. 31A. Further, in each of the scenes of (a) to (c) of FIG. 32 (A) and (a) to (c) of FIG. 32 (B), they are erased from the active display area AHA in the scene of (c) of FIG. It is an example of the active display change presentation performed when the specific display AH remains in the erased state.

  Further, FIG. 32 (A) shows the success effect of the second system change effect, and as the effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. It is assumed that "very heavy") is set. Further, FIG. 32 (B) shows a failure effect of the second system change effect, and as the effect mode of the active display change effect, the active display change effect pattern CP1 shown in FIG. It is assumed that "normal") is set.

  The scene of (a) in FIG. 32A after (c) of FIG. 31A starts variable display in the scene of (b) in FIG. 31A, and the active display area AHA in the scene of (c) in FIG. This is an example when the second system change effect is performed immediately after the specific display AH displayed on the screen is erased (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 30). In the scene of (a) of FIG. 32 (A), an arrow Y2 is displayed at the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect, in which the character of "superheat" is drawn. The scene of (a) of FIG. 32 (B) is the same as the scene of (a) of FIG. 32 (A).

That is, (a) of FIG. 32 (A) to (c) of FIG. 32 (A) is a success effect in the second system change effect, and (a) of FIG. 32 (B) to FIG. 32 (B) (C) to (c) are failure effects in the second system change effect, and (c) of FIG. 31A to (a) of FIG. 32 (A) and (c) of FIG. 31A to (B) of FIG. This is a common effect that is commonly executed between the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.
In addition, in this common effect, success effect, and failure effect, the specific display of the first display mode deleted from the active display area AHA in the scene of FIG. 31A (b) is actively displayed as the specific display of the second display mode. This is an example of a specific effect that indicates (is scolding) whether to be displayed (redisplayed) in the area AHA.

In the scene of (b) of FIG. 32 (A) after (a) of FIG. 32 (A), the arrow Y 2 which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of (a) of FIG. It is a scene moving toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and colliding with the active display frame AHW.
The scene of (c) of FIG. 32 (A) after (b) of FIG. 32 (A) is active after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (b) of FIG. 32 (A) It is a scene where the thickness of the line of the display frame AHW is changing as the display mode of "very thick".

On the other hand, the scene of (b) in FIG. 32 (B) after (a) in FIG. 32 (B) is an arrow that is the second systematic change effect displayed in the scene of (a) in FIG. This is a scene in which Y2 moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and moves to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW.
The scene of (c) of FIG. 32 (B) after (b) of FIG. 32 (B) disappears without the arrow Y2 colliding with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (b) of FIG. 32 (B) This is a scene when the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW does not change as it is in the "normal" display mode.
And in the scene of (c) of Drawing 32 (B), the decoration pattern of decoration pattern display area 5L and the decoration pattern of decoration pattern display area 5R are a scene displayed in reach mode.

  For example, after the scene of (c) of FIG. 32A or the scene of (c) of FIG. 32B, (d) of FIG. 31B (A) to (e) of FIG. 31B (A). 31D (a) or (f) in FIG. 31B (B) to display the specific display AH of the second display mode in the active display area AHA, or 31C (C) by performing any of the scenes from (d) to (e) in FIG. 31C, the identification display of the first display mode and the identification of the second display mode in the active display area AHA Do not show the display.

  FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B are diagrams showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (c) in FIG. 33A (A) and (d) to (e) in FIG. 33B (A) are obtained by arranging the respective scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. . The same applies to (a) to (c) in FIG. 33A (B) and (d) to (e) in FIG. 33B (B). In FIG. 33A and FIG. 33B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. Further, FIGS. 33A (A) and 33B (A) show the success effect of the first system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern BP4 shown in FIG. 29A as the effect mode of the active display change effect. It is assumed that (changed (shape "star") is set. 33A (B) and FIG. 33B (B) show failure representation of the first system change production, and the active display change production pattern BP1 (change shown in (A) of FIG. 29 as a production mode of the active display change production It is assumed that nothing (shape "ball") is set. For example, each scene of FIGS. 33A and 33B is performed after the scenes of (a) to (c) of FIG. 31A.

  The scene of (a) in FIG. 33A (A) after (c) of FIG. 31A starts variable display in the scene of (b) in FIG. 31A and the active display area AHA in the scene of (c) This is an example when the first system change effect is executed immediately after the specific display AH displayed on the screen is erased (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 30). For example, in (a) of FIG. 33A (A), three figures (star Z1, triangle Z2, pentagon Z3) are displayed as a figure group Y1 in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 as the first system change effect.

The scene of (b) of FIG. 33A (A) after (a) of FIG. 33A (A) is a graphic group Y1 which is the first systematic change effect displayed in the scene of (a) of FIG. 33A (A). Is a scene where the triangle Z2 disappears while moving toward the lower part of the image display 5, and the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 continue moving.
The scene of (c) of FIG. 33A (A) after (b) of FIG. 33A (A) is an image of the graphic group Y1 which is the first systematic change effect from the scene of (b) of FIG. It is a scene which moves toward the lower part of the display device 5 and among the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 constituting the figure group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears and only the star Z1 continues to move. Further, in each of the scenes (a) to (c) of FIG. 33A (A), when the specific display AH erased from the active display area AHA in the scene of (c) of FIG. It is an example of the active display change presentation to be executed. (A) of FIG. 33A (B) to (c) of FIG. 33A (B) are also similar to (a) of FIG. 33A (A) to (c) of FIG. 33A (A).

That is, from (a) in FIG. 33A (A) to (c) in FIG. 33A (A) and from (d) in FIG. 33B (A) to (e) in FIG. It is an effect, from (a) in FIG. 33A (B) to (c) in FIG. 33A (B), and from (d) in FIG. 33B (B) to (e) in FIG. It is a failure production in. Further, (a) of FIG. 33A (A) to (c) of FIG. 33A (A) and (a) of FIG. 33A (B) to (c) of FIG. 33A (B) are the first system. It is a common effect that is commonly executed between the success effect and the failure effect in the change effect.
In addition, in this common effect, success effect, and failure effect, the specific display of the first display mode deleted from the active display area AHA in the scene of FIG. 31A (b) is actively displayed as the specific display of the second display mode. This is an example of a specific effect that indicates (is scolding) whether to be displayed (redisplayed) in the area AHA.

The scene of (d) of FIG. 33B (A) after (c) of FIG. 33A (A) is a graphic group Y1 which is the first systematic change effect displayed in the scene of (c) of FIG. 33A (A). It is a scene where the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the above moves further toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and collides with the specific display AH.
The scene of (e) of FIG. 33B (A) after (d) of FIG. 33B (A) remains without disappearing in the specific display AH in the scene of (d) of FIG. After the star Z1 collides, the display shape of the specific display AH is displayed in a display mode (second display mode) in which the display mode is changed from the first display mode to the "star" different from the first display mode. Further, the scene of (e) in FIG. 33B (A) is a scene in which the decorative symbol "7" of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol display area 5R is in the reach mode.

On the other hand, the scene of (d) of FIG. 33B (B) after (c) of FIG. 33A (A) is a graphic showing the first system change effect displayed in the scene of (c) of FIG. This is a scene in which the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the group Y1 moves further toward the lower part of the image display 5, but disappears before colliding with the specific display AH.
In the scene of (e) of FIG. 33B (B) after (d) of FIG. 33B (B), the scene of (d) of FIG. This is a scene where the specific display AH remains erased from the active display area AHA in the scene of (c) of FIG. 31A because the star Z1 disappears without collision. Further, the scene of (e) in FIG. 33B (B) is a scene in which the decorative symbol “7” of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol display area 5R is in the reach mode.

  FIG. 34A and FIG. 34B are diagrams showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (b) of FIG. 34A (A) and FIG. 34A (B), (c) to (e) of FIG. 34B (A) and FIG. Each scene in is arranged in time series. In FIG. 31A and FIG. 31B, the arrow “内” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative symbol is changing. Further, FIGS. 34A (A) and 34B (A) show the successful effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and are shown in FIG. 29C as the effect mode of the active display change effect. It is assumed that the active display change effect pattern AP12 (changed (thick "very thick"), changed (shape "star")) is set. 34A (B) and FIG. 34B (B) show the failure effects of the first system change effect and the second system change effect, and the active display shown in FIG. 29C as the effect mode of the active display change effect It is assumed that the change presentation pattern AP1 (no change (shape “ball”), no change (thickness “normal”)) is set. Moreover, in each scene of FIG. 34A (A) and FIG. 34A (B), it is performed when the specific display AH erased from the active display area AHA in the scene of (c) of FIG. 31A remains erased. It is an example of the active display change production performed.

  (A) of FIG. 34A (A) after (c) of FIG. 31A starts variable display in the scene of (b) of FIG. 31A and displays in the active display area AHA in the scene of (c) of FIG. This is an example when the first system change effect and the second system change effect are performed immediately after the specific display AH is erased (for example, timing 1 in FIG. 30). In the scene (a) of FIG. 34 (A), three figures (star Z1, triangle Z2 and pentagon Z3) are displayed as a figure group Y1 in the upper right part of the image display device 5 as a first systematic change effect. As a systematic change effect, an arrow Y2 is displayed on the upper left portion of the image display device 5, in which a character of "superheat" is drawn. The (a) of FIG. 34A (B) to (b) of FIG. 34A (B) is also similar to (a) of FIG. 34A (A) to (b) of FIG. 34A (A).

That is, from (a) in FIG. 34A (A) to (b) in FIG. 34A (A) and (c) to (e) in FIG. 34B (A) are successes in the first system change effect and the second system change effect 34A (B) to (b) in FIG. 34A (B), and (c) to (e) in FIG. 34B (B) are the first system change effect and the second system change It is a failure production in production.
In addition, (a) in FIG. 34A (A) and (a) in FIG. 34A (B) are common effects that are commonly executed with success effects and failure effects in the first system change effect and the second system change effect. It is.
In addition, in this common effect, success effect, and failure effect, the specific display of the first display mode deleted from the active display area AHA in the scene of FIG. 31A (b) is actively displayed as the specific display of the second display mode. This is an example of a specific effect that indicates (is scolding) whether to be displayed (redisplayed) in the area AHA.

  The scene of (b) of FIG. 34A (A) after (a) of FIG. 34A (A) is a graphic group Y1 which is the first systematic change effect displayed in the scene of (a) of FIG. 34A (A). Moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5, the triangle Z2 disappears, the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 continue to move, and the second system change effect displayed in the scene of (a) of FIG. 34A (A) This is a scene in which a certain arrow Y2 moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and collides with the active display frame AHW.

  The scene of (c) of FIG. 34B (A) after (b) of FIG. 34A (A) is active after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (b) of FIG. 34A (A) It is a scene where the thickness of the line of the display frame AHW is changing as the display mode of "very thick". Further, in the scene of (c) of FIG. 34A (A), the graphic group Y1 which is the first system change effect further moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 from the scene of (b) of FIG. Among the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 constituting the figure group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears, and only the star Z1 continues moving.

The scene of (d) of FIG. 34B (A) after (c) of FIG. 34B (A) is a graphic group Y1 which is the first systematic change effect displayed in the scene of (c) of FIG. 34A (A). It is a scene where the star Z1 remaining without disappearing in the above moves further toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and collides with the specific display AH.
The scene of (e) of FIG. 34B (A) after (d) of FIG. 34B (A) remains without disappearing in the specific display AH in the scene of (d) of FIG. After the star Z1 collides, the display shape of the specific display AH is displayed in a display mode (second display mode) in which the display mode is changed from the first display mode to the "star" different from the first display mode. Further, the scene of (e) in FIG. 34B (A) is a scene in which the decorative symbol “7” of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol display area 5R is in the reach mode.

  On the other hand, the scene of (b) of FIG. 34B (B) after (a) of FIG. 34A (B) is an arrow showing the second system change effect displayed in the scene of (a) of FIG. 34A (B). This is a scene in which Y2 moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and moves to the lower part of the image display device 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW. In addition, the scene of (c) of FIG. 34A (B) after (b) of FIG. 34B (B) is a graphic group Y1 which is the first systematic change effect further from the scene of (b) of FIG. 34A (B). Is a scene moving toward the lower part of the image display device 5 and among the star Z1 and the pentagon Z3 constituting the figure group Y1, the pentagon Z3 disappears and only the star Z1 continues to move.

The scene of (d) of FIG. 34B (B) after (c) of FIG. 34B (B) is a graphic group Y1 which is the first systematic change effect displayed in the scene of (c) of FIG. 34B (B). It is a scene where the remaining star Z1 moves further toward the lower part of the image display 5, but disappears before colliding with the specific display AH.
The scene (e) in FIG. 34B (B) is identified because the star Z1 left without disappearing in the figure group Y1 on the specific display AH in the scene (d) in FIG. 34B (B) is annihilated without collision. This is a scene in which the display AH remains erased from the active display area AHA in the scene (c) of FIG. 31A. Further, the scene of (e) in FIG. 34B (B) is a scene in which the decorative symbol "7" of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol display area 5R is in the reach mode.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, in FIGS. 35 (a) and 35 (b), (c) to (d) in FIG. 35 (A), and (c) to (d) in FIG. The scenes are arranged in time series. In FIG. 35, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is in motion. Further, FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (b) and (c) to (d) in FIG. 35 (A) show the success effect of the second system change effect, and as the effect mode of the active display change effect, FIG. It is assumed that the active display change effect pattern CP3 (changed (thick "very thick") shown in (B) is set. Also, FIGS. 35 (a)-(b) and (c)-(d) in FIG. 35 (B) show the failure effects of the second system change effect, and as the effect mode of the active display change effect, FIG. It is assumed that the active display change effect pattern CP1 (no change (thickness "normal")) shown in (B) is set.
For example, each scene in FIG. 35 may be after (a) to (c) in FIG. 31A or after (d) to (e) in FIG. 31B (A) or in (a) to (c) in FIG. 31D is executed after the scenes (d) to (f) in FIG. 31B (B). In each scene in FIG. 35, the display mode of the specific display is from the second display mode to the third display mode after the specific display AH of the second display mode is displayed (redisplayed) in the active display area AHA. It is executed as a specific display change presentation asking whether or not to change to.

  31A of FIG. 31B (A) or FIG. 31B (B) after (f) is a scene of FIG. 31B (A) (D) or FIG. 31B (B) of FIG. 31A (b) is displayed in the active display area AHA at the timing (specific timing) after the decorative symbol "7" is displayed in the reach mode in the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R in the scene of). Active display area in a display mode different from the display mode (the first display mode of the blue specific display) (for example, the display mode of the yellow specific display (the second display mode)) This is a scene in which the specific display AH is redisplayed on the AHA.

  The scene of (a) of FIG. 35 is an example when the second system change effect is executed after reaching (for example, timing 3 of FIG. 30). In the scene of FIG. 35 (b) after FIG. 35 (a), the decorative symbol “7” is displayed in the reach pattern in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the scene of FIG. 35 (a) At the timing, an arrow Y2 is displayed on the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as a second system change effect, in which the characters of "superheat" are drawn.

  That is, (a) of FIG. 35 to (b) of FIG. 35, (c) of FIG. 35 (A) to (d) of FIG. (A) to (b) of FIG. 35, (c) of FIG. 35 (B) to (d) of FIG. 35 (B) are failure effects in the second system change effect. Also, (a) in FIG. 35 to (b) in FIG. 35 are common effects that are commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.

The scene of (c) of FIG. 35 (A) after (b) of FIG. 35 is the lower part of the image display device 5 with the arrow Y2 which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of (b) of FIG. Moving toward, and colliding with the active display frame AHW.
The scene of (d) in FIG. 35A after (c) of FIG. 35A is active after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (c) in FIG. The thickness of the line of the display frame AHW changes as the display mode of the specific display of "very thick".

On the other hand, in the scene of (c) of FIG. 35 (B) after (b) of FIG. 35, the arrow Y2 which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of (b) of FIG. It is a scene moving toward the lower part of the image display apparatus 5 without colliding with the active display frame AHW.
The scene of (d) in FIG. 35B after (c) of FIG. 35B disappears without the arrow Y2 colliding with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (c) in FIG. 35 (B) Because of this, the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW does not change as it is the display mode of the “normal” specific display.

  Also for the first system change effect, similarly, the active display change effect may be executed after the reach is established. In addition, similarly to the first system change effect and the second system change effect, the active display change effect may be executed after the reach is established.

  36A and 36B are diagrams showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. FIG. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 36A and (g) to (h) in FIG. 36B are obtained by arranging the respective scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. In addition, in FIG. 36A and FIG. 36B, the arrow "画像" in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is in motion. Moreover, FIG. 36A and FIG. 36B show the success production | presentation of 2nd system | strain change production, and the active display change production pattern CP3 (it has change (a thickness) shown in (B) of FIG. It is assumed that "very heavy") is set.

  In (a) of FIG. 36A, when the specific display AH in the active display area AHA (when the variable display is started, the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA, or A special image or the like representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, the hold display H3, and the hold display H4 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. It is a scene where the decorative symbols “3”, “9” and “4” are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R.

The scene of FIG. 36A (b) after (a) of FIG. 36A is an example when the variation of the decorative symbol corresponding to the suspension display H1 displayed in the first start winning a prize storage display area 5HL is started. For example, in the scene of FIG. 36A (b), the specific display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 is a scene displayed in the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display H1 in the active display area AHA. For example, assuming that the hold display H1 is displayed in the blue display mode in the scene of FIG. 36A (a), the specific display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 is the hold display H1 in the scene of FIG. 36A (b). In the display mode (first display mode) of the blue specific display, the display mode is displayed in the active display area AHA as a display mode corresponding to the display mode of.
Moreover, in the scene of (b) of FIG. 36A, the hold display H1 is erased from the first start winning a prize storage display area 5HL, and other hold displays other than the hold display H1 (hold display H2, hold display H3, hold display H4) Are displayed shifted to the right (active display area AHA side).

  In (c) of FIG. 36A, the display pattern of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative pattern of the decorative symbol display area 5R are different from the reach aspect after the variable display is started in the scene of FIG. It is a scene that is stopped and displayed. At this time, a specific display AH of a second display mode different from the first display mode is displayed in the active display area AHA.

The change of the display mode from the specific display of the first display mode displayed in the scene of (b) of FIG. 36A to the specific display of the second display mode displayed in the scene of (c) of FIG. After the specific display of the first display mode is deleted, the display may be changed by displaying the specific display of the second display mode, or the active display change effect, etc. for the specific display of the first display mode. You may change by performing an effect and displaying the specific display of a 2nd display mode.
The scene of (d) in FIG. 36A is a scene in which the chance symbol indicated as “good opportunity” in the decorative symbol display area 5C appears on the image display device 5 by low-speed scroll. At this time, in the active display area AHA, the specific display AH of the second display mode is displayed as in (c) of FIG. 36A.

  In the scene of (e) of FIG. 36A, the chance symbol is a scene temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C. And the scene of (f) of FIG. 36A is a scene when all the decorative patterns displayed temporarily stopped in the scene of (e) of FIG. 36A are variably displayed (re-variable display) again. At this time, the specific display AH of the second display mode displayed in the active display area AHA in (c) of FIG. 36A is erased.

In (g) of FIG. 36B, the arrow Y2 on which the character of "superheat" is drawn is displayed on the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change effect. Also at this time, the specific display AH of the second display mode is erased as in (e) of FIG. 36A.
From (a) in FIG. 36A to (g) in FIG. 36B are common effects that are commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.

  In the scene of (h) of FIG. 36B, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed in the scene of FIG. 36B (g), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5, and collides with the active display frame AHW. It is a scene where Also at this time, the specific display AH of the second display mode is erased as in (e) of FIG. 36A.

  In the scene of (i) of FIG. 36B, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (h) of FIG. 36B, the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of “very thick”. ing. In addition, the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW changes as the display mode of "very thick", and the display mode of the active display changes to the display mode of red, for example, the display mode of the specific display AH is the second While changing to the 3rd display mode different from a display mode, it is a scene where the decorative symbol of decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol of decorative symbol display area 5R become a reach aspect.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (g) in FIG. 37 show the respective scenes in the image display device 5 arranged in time series. In FIG. 37, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing. Further, FIG. 37 shows a success effect of the second system change effect, and the active display change effect pattern CP3 shown in FIG. 29 (B) (with change (thick “very thick” as the effect mode of the active display change effect. )) Shall be set.
In each scene in FIG. 37, the display mode of the specific display is from the second display mode to the third display mode after the specific display AH of the second display mode is displayed (redisplayed) in the active display area AHA. It is executed as a specific display change presentation asking whether or not to change to. Also, the explanation of the defeat effect is omitted.

  In the scene of (a) of FIG. 37, the chance symbol described as “good opportunity” in the decorative symbol display area 5C is a scene in which the image display device 5 appears at low speed scrolling. Further, in the scene of FIG. 37 (b), the chance symbol is displayed on the symbol display area 5C as a temporary stop. Then, in the scene of (b) of FIG. 37, all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily stop are variably displayed (re-variable display) again. At this time, the specific display AH of the second display mode is displayed in the active display area AHA, similarly to (e) of FIG. 31B (A) or (f) of FIG. 31B (B).

Further, in the scene of (c) of FIG. 37, an arrow Y2 is displayed at the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change rendition in which the character of "superheat" is drawn. At this time, the specific display AH of the second display mode is displayed in the active display area AHA, similarly to (e) of FIG. 31B (A) or (f) of FIG. 31B (B).
Here, (a) in FIG. 37 to (c) in FIG. 37 are common effects that are commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.

  Then, in the scene of (d) of FIG. 37, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed during the re-variable display in the scene of (c) of FIG. 37, moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. , A scene that is colliding with the active display frame AHW. At this time, the specific display AH of the second display mode is displayed in the active display area AHA, similarly to (e) of FIG. 31B (A) or (f) of FIG. 31B (B).

In the scene of (e) of FIG. 37, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW in the scene of (d) of FIG. 37, the display mode of the specific display of the thick line of the active display frame AHW is "very thick". The display mode of the specific display changes to a third display mode different from the second display mode, and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5R are in the reach aspect. is there.
Then, in the scene of (f) of FIG. 37, after the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW changes to the third display mode of the specific display of "very thick", the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5L When the decorative pattern in the display area 5R is in the reach mode, the chance symbol is displayed on the image display device 5, and in the scene of (g) of FIG. 37, this chance symbol is displayed temporarily on the decorative symbol display area 5C. Without doing so, the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5R are stopped and displayed as a reach aspect.

  FIG. 38A and FIG. 38B are diagrams showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 38A and (g) to (i) in FIG. 38B are obtained by arranging the respective scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. In FIG. 38A and FIG. 38B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is in motion. Moreover, FIG. 38A and FIG. 38B represent the success presentation of the second system change presentation, and as the presentation aspect of the active display change presentation, the active display change presentation pattern CP3 shown in FIG. It is assumed that "very heavy") is set. Also, the explanation of the defeat effect is omitted. In each scene in FIG. 37, the display mode of the specific display is from the second display mode to the third display mode after the specific display AH of the second display mode is displayed (redisplayed) in the active display area AHA. It is executed as a specific display change presentation asking whether or not to change to.

  In (a) of FIG. 38A, the specific display AH in the active display area AHA (when the variable display is started, the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA, or the active display A special image or the like representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, the hold display H3, and the hold display H4 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. It is a scene that

The scene of (b) of FIG. 38A after (a) of FIG. 38A is an example when the variation of the decorative design corresponding to the suspension display H1 displayed in the first start winning a prize storage display area 5HL is started . For example, in the scene of FIG. 38A (b), the specific display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 is a scene displayed in the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display H1 in the active display area AHA. For example, assuming that the hold display H1 is displayed in the blue display mode in the scene of FIG. 38A (a), the specific display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 is the hold display H1 in the scene of FIG. 38A (b). In the display mode (first display mode) of the blue specific display, the display mode is displayed in the active display area AHA as a display mode corresponding to the display mode of.
Further, in the scene of FIG. 38A (b), the hold display H1 is erased from the first start winning a prize storage display area 5HL, and other hold displays other than the hold display H1 (hold display H2, hold display H3, hold display H4) Are displayed shifted to the right (active display area AHA side).

  (C) of FIG. 38A is an arrow Y2 in which the character of “superheat” is drawn on the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change presentation after variable display is started in the scene of (b) of FIG. Is displayed. At this time, the specific display of the first display mode displayed in the active display area AHA in the scene of FIG. 38A (b) is erased from the active display area AHA. Here, (a) in FIG. 38A to (c) in FIG. 38A are common effects that are commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.

  Then, in the scene of (d) of FIG. 38A, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed during the re-variable display in the scene of FIG. 38B (c), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. , A scene that is colliding with the active display frame AHW. At this time, the specific display AH erased in the active display area AHA in the scene of (c) of FIG. 38A remains in the erased state.

  Then, in the scene of (e) of FIG. 38A, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW, the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW changes to the display mode of “very thick”, and the second display mode The active display frame AHW is displayed in the active display frame AHW, and the "thick" active display frame AHW and the specific display of the second display mode are displayed as the specific display in the active display area AHA, and the decoration of the decorative symbol display area 5L is displayed. The decorative symbol of the symbol and the decorative symbol display area 5R is a scene which is stopped and displayed in a display manner different from the reach manner.

The scene of (f) of FIG. 38A is a scene in which the chance symbol indicated as “good opportunity” is displayed on the image display device 5 by low-speed scroll in the decorative symbol display area 5C. The scene of (g) in FIG. 38B is a scene in which the chance symbol appearing on the image display device 5 in the scene of (f) in FIG. 38A is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C. The scene of (h) in FIG. 38B is a scene in which all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily are displayed variably (again, variably).
Then, in the scene of (i) of FIG. 38B, the pseudo continuous variation is finished, and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed as a reach form. A display mode different from the display mode of the specific display before the display mode of the specific display deleted in the scene of) is erased, and the active display area AHA as a third display mode different from the second display mode Is displayed on.

39A and 39B are diagrams showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. FIG. Specifically, (a) to (f) in FIG. 36A and (g) to (i) in FIG. 36B are obtained by arranging the respective scenes in the image display device 5 in time series. In FIG. 39A and FIG. 39B, the arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative design is in motion. Moreover, FIG. 39A and FIG. 39B represent the success presentation of the second system change presentation, and as the presentation aspect of the active display change presentation, the active display change presentation pattern CP3 shown in FIG. It is assumed that "very heavy") is set. In addition, the description of the failure effect is omitted.
In each of the scenes in FIGS. 39A and 39B, after the specific display AH of the second display mode is displayed (redisplayed) in the active display area AHA, the display mode of the specific display is the second display mode to the third display mode. It is executed as a specific display change presentation asking whether or not to change to the display mode of.

  In (a) of FIG. 39A, when the specific display AH in the active display area AHA (when the variable display is started, the hold display corresponding to the variable display is moved to the predetermined active display area AHA, or A special image or the like representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed, and the hold display H1, the hold display H2, the hold display H3, and the hold display H4 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. It is a scene that

The scene of (b) of FIG. 39A after (a) of FIG. 39A is an example when the variation of the decorative symbol corresponding to the suspension display H1 displayed in the first start winning a prize storage display area 5HL is started . For example, in the scene of (b) of FIG. 39A, the specific display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 is a scene displayed in the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display H1 in the active display area AHA. For example, if the hold display H1 is displayed in the blue display mode in the scene of FIG. 39A (a), the specific display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 is the hold display H1 in the scene of FIG. 39A (b). In the display mode (first display mode) of the blue specific display, the display mode is displayed in the active display area AHA as a display mode corresponding to the display mode of.
Moreover, in the scene of (b) of FIG. 39A, the hold display H1 is erased from the first start winning a prize storage display area 5HL, and other hold displays other than the hold display H1 (hold display H2, hold display H3, hold display H4) Are displayed shifted to the right (active display area AHA side).

  In (c) of FIG. 39A, an arrow Y2 is drawn with the letter “superheat” in the upper left portion of the image display device 5 as the second system change presentation after variable display is started in the scene of (b) in FIG. Is displayed. At this time, the specific display of the first display mode displayed in the active display area AHA in the scene of FIG. 39A (b) is erased from the active display area AHA. Here, (a) in FIG. 39A to (c) in FIG. 39A are common effects that are commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect in the second system change effect.

Then, in the scene of (d) of FIG. 39A, the arrow Y2, which is the second system change effect displayed during the re-variable display in the scene of FIG. 39B (c), moves toward the lower part of the image display device 5. , A scene that is colliding with the active display frame AHW. At this time, the specific display AH erased in the active display area AHA in the scene of (c) of FIG. 39A remains in the erased state.
Then, in the scene of (e) of FIG. 39A, after the arrow Y2 collides with the active display frame AHW, the thickness of the line of the active display frame AHW is the third display mode as the display mode of the specific display of “thick”. It changes to a specific display, and it is a scene where the decorative pattern of decorative pattern display area 5L and the decorative pattern of decorative pattern display area 5R are temporarily stopped in reach mode.

The scene of (f) of FIG. 39A is a scene in which the chance symbol described as “good opportunity” in the decorative symbol display area 5C appears on the image display device 5 by low speed scroll. At this time, the specific display of the third display mode is displayed in the active display area AHA.
Further, in the scene of (g) of FIG. 39B, the chance symbol appearing on the image display device 5 in the scene of (f) of FIG. 39A is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C. At this time, the specific display of the third display mode is displayed in the active display area AHA.

Then, in the scene of (h) in FIG. 39B, all the decorative symbols displayed temporarily stop are variably displayed (re-variable display) again. At this time, the specific display of the third display mode is displayed in the active display area AHA.
Then, in the scene of (i) of FIG. 39B, the pseudo continuous variation ends, and the decorative pattern of the decorative pattern display area 5L and the decorative pattern of the decorative pattern display area 5R reach the stop mode and are displayed. At this time, the specific display of the third display mode is displayed in the active display area AHA.

  Here, in FIG. 39A and FIG. 39B, a scene example in which the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed in reach mode is shown in FIG. 39A (e) and FIG. 39B (i). However, as shown in FIG. 39A and FIG. 39B, in the case where the pseudo continuous fluctuation occurs after the reach is established, “timing 3” in FIG. 30 is treated as the timing of FIG. 39B (i). That is, the reach establishment in FIG. 39A and FIG. 39B means that the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed as the reach aspect in FIG. It is the scene of i).

  In FIG. 31 to FIG. 39, the success effect may be executed at the timing when the active display change effect (the first system change effect, the second system change effect, the first system change effect, and the second system change effect) is performed. The degree of expectation is different. For example, when there is an active display change effect performed at a first timing and an active display change effect performed at a second timing later than the first timing in the variation, the change is performed at the second timing. This means that there is a high degree of expectation that the successful presentation in the active display change presentation can be performed.

In the present embodiment, the first hold display or the second hold display when the first hold display or the second hold display is displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second start winning storage display area 5HR. And the first display mode displayed in the active display area AHA when the display mode of the second display mode corresponds to the display mode (first display mode) of the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA. The first start winning storage display area 5HL and the second starting winning storage display area 5HR even when the specific display of the second display mode does not change to the display mode (second display mode) of the specific display different from the first display mode. The display mode (for example, blue, yellow, etc.) different from the normal display mode (for example, the display mode of the white hold display) of the display mode of the first hold display and the display mode of the second hold display when displayed on In the case of a display mode higher than the normal display mode, such as the display mode of the color reserve display, the specific display displayed in the first display mode in the active display area AHA is erased at a predetermined timing and The specific display of the first display mode may be displayed on the active display area AHA at a later specific timing.
As a result, when the display mode when the display is on hold is a display mode higher than the normal display mode, the player's sense of expectation for a specific gaming state such as a big hit can be improved.

(First modification)
In the above description of the embodiment, an example is described in which the specific display corresponding to the pending display corresponding to the change is displayed in the active display area AHA at the start of the change and then deleted. The hold display corresponding to the hold information corresponding to the said fluctuation is deleted from the start winning prize storage display area, and the display manner of the specific display corresponding to the fluctuation is the display manner of the specific display corresponding to the display manner of the hold display When changing to the display mode of a different specific display, the specific display may be displayed in the active display area AHA. This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 40, 41A, 41B, and 41C.

  In this case, instead of the setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the specific display by the display mode determination table of the specific display shown in FIG. 26, the determination rate of the display mode of the specific display by the display mode determination table of the specific display shown in FIG. The setting example of may be used.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing another example of setting of the determination ratio of the display mode of the specific display by the display mode determination table of the specific display. In the illustrated example, in the first hold display in which the display mode at the time of addition is determined with reference to FIG. Based on the display mode of the specific display when it is digested in the variable display (when the digestion order is the first) and displayed in the first start winning a prize storage display area 5HL, and the variation category Reference is made to determine the display mode of the display.

In the illustrated example, when the display mode of the specific display is different from the display mode corresponding to the display mode of the hold display when the start winning storage display area 5H is displayed, the specific display is displayed actively. It is an active display pattern to be displayed in the area AHA.
For example, the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the white hold display is the display mode of the white specific display, and the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the blue hold display is the blue specific display The display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the yellow hold display is the display mode of the yellow specific display, and the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the red hold display is The following description will be made on the assumption that the display mode is a red specific display.

  For example, in the illustrated example, when the display mode of the first hold display immediately before the change is white and the special view display result is lost (non-reach), “the active display pattern is“ APW1-3 "or" APW1-4 "is selected. The active display pattern "APW1-3" is selected as the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (white) of the first hold display immediately before the change becomes the specific display mode of the white. It is. In the active display pattern "APW1-3", the pending display corresponding to the change is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, for example, the timing when the change starts, and the display mode of the specific display corresponds to the specific display. Since it corresponds to the display mode of the hold display, it is an active display pattern in which the active display area AHA is not caused to display the specific display while the hold display is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H. That is, the active display pattern "APW1-3" is a hold display corresponding to the specific display of the variation, and in the case of the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display, the start winning storage display area 5H Is an active display pattern in which the specific display is not displayed (redisplayed) in the active display area AHA.

  Further, for example, the active display pattern “APW1-4” has a blue different from the display mode of the white specific display as the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (white) of the first hold display immediately before the change. It is an active display pattern selected when it becomes a display mode of the specific display of. In the active display pattern "APW1-4", the pending display corresponding to the change is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, for example, the timing when the change starts, and the display mode of the specific display corresponds to the specific display. Since it is a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the hold display, after the hold display is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, a specific timing after the predetermined timing, for example, decoration of the decorative symbol display area It is an active display pattern displayed in a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display in the active display area AHA at the timing before the symbol becomes the reach mode. That is, when the active display pattern "APW1-4" is a hold display corresponding to the specific display of the variation, and is not a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display, the start winning storage display area 5H It is an active display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA in a display mode other than the specific display mode corresponding to the display mode by erasing the pending display at a predetermined timing and at the specific timing after the erasing.

Also, for example, when the display mode of the first hold display immediately before the change is white and the special view display result is “reach”, “APW2−” is displayed as the active display pattern. 4 "," APW2-5 ", or" APW2-6 "is selected.
For example, the active display pattern “APW2-4” is selected as the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (white color) of the first hold display immediately before the change becomes the specific display of the white. It is a display pattern. In the active display pattern "APW2-4", the pending display corresponding to the change is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, for example, the timing when the change starts, and the display mode of the specific display corresponds to the specific display. Since it corresponds to the display mode of the hold display, it is an active display pattern in which the active display area AHA is not caused to display the specific display while the hold display is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H. That is, the active display pattern "APW2-4" is a hold display corresponding to the specific display of the variation, and in the case of the display form of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display, the start winning combination storage display area 5H Is an active display pattern in which the specific display is not displayed (redisplayed) in the active display area AHA.

  Also, for example, the active display pattern “APW2-5” has a blue different from the display mode of the white specific display as the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (white) of the first hold display immediately before the change. It is an active display pattern selected when it becomes a display mode of the specific display of. In the active display pattern "APW2-5", the pending display corresponding to the fluctuation is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, for example, the timing when the fluctuation starts, and the display mode of the specific display corresponds to the specific display. Since it is a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the hold display, after the hold display is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, a specific timing after the predetermined timing, for example, decoration of the decorative symbol display area It is an active display pattern displayed in a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display in the active display area AHA at the timing before the symbol becomes the reach mode. That is, the active display pattern "APW2-5" is a hold display corresponding to the specific display of the variation, and is not a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display, from the start winning storage display area 5H. It is an active display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA in a display mode other than the specific display mode corresponding to the display mode by erasing the pending display at a predetermined timing and at the specific timing after the erasing.

  In addition, for example, the active display pattern “APW 2-6” has a blue different from the display mode of the white specific display as the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (white) of the first hold display immediately before the change. It is an active display pattern selected when it becomes a display mode of the specific display of. In the active display pattern "APW2-6", the pending display corresponding to the change is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, for example, at the start of the change, and the display mode of the specific display corresponds to the specific display. Since it is a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the hold display, after deleting the hold display from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, a specific timing after the predetermined timing, for example, of the decorative symbol display area It is an active display pattern displayed in a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display in the active display area AHA at the timing after the decorative symbol has reached the reach mode. That is, the active display pattern "APW 2-6" is a hold display corresponding to the specific display of the variation, and is not a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display, from the start winning storage display area 5H. It is an active display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA in a display mode other than the specific display mode corresponding to the display mode by erasing the pending display at a predetermined timing and at the specific timing after the erasing.

Also, for example, when the display mode of the first hold display immediately before the change is white and the special view display result is a big hit, “APW3-4”, “APW3” as the active display pattern One of "-5" and "APW3-6" is selected.
For example, the active display pattern "APW3-4" is selected as the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (white color) of the first hold display immediately before the change becomes the specific display of the white. It is a display pattern. In the active display pattern "APW3-4", the pending display corresponding to the change is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, for example, the timing at the start of the change, and the display mode of the specific display corresponds to the specific display. Since it corresponds to the display mode of the hold display, it is an active display pattern in which the active display area AHA is not caused to display the specific display while the hold display is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H. That is, the active display pattern "APW3-4" is a hold display corresponding to the specific display of the variation, and in the case of the display form of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display, the start winning combination storage display area 5H Is an active display pattern in which the specific display is not displayed (redisplayed) in the active display area AHA.

  Also, for example, the active display pattern “APW3-5” has a yellow color different from the display mode of the white specific display as the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (white) of the first hold display immediately before the change. It is an active display pattern selected when it becomes a display mode of the specific display of. In the active display pattern "APW3-5", the pending display corresponding to the change is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, for example, the timing when the change starts, and the display mode of the specific display corresponds to the specific display. Since it is a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the hold display, after the hold display is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, a specific timing after the predetermined timing, for example, decoration of the decorative symbol display area It is an active display pattern displayed in a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display in the active display area AHA at the timing before the symbol becomes the reach mode. That is, the active display pattern “APW3-5” is a hold display corresponding to the specific display of the variation, and is not a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display, from the start winning storage display area 5H It is an active display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA in a display mode other than the specific display mode corresponding to the display mode by erasing the pending display at a predetermined timing and at the specific timing after the erasing.

  Also, for example, the active display pattern “APW3-6” has a yellow color different from the display mode of the white specific display as the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (white) of the first hold display immediately before the change. It is an active display pattern selected when it becomes a display mode of the specific display of. In the active display pattern "APW3-6", the pending display corresponding to the change is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, for example, the timing when the change starts, and the display mode of the specific display corresponds to the specific display. Since it is a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the hold display, after deleting the hold display from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, a specific timing after the predetermined timing, for example, of the decorative symbol display area It is an active display pattern displayed in a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display in the active display area AHA at the timing after the decorative symbol has reached the reach mode. That is, the active display pattern "APW3-6" is a hold display corresponding to the specific display of the variation, and is not a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display, from the start winning storage display area 5H It is an active display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA in a display mode other than the specific display mode corresponding to the display mode by erasing the pending display at a predetermined timing and at the specific timing after the erasing.

  For example, in the illustrated example, when the display mode of the first hold display immediately before the change is blue and the special view display result is lost (non-reach), “the active display pattern is“ APB1-3 "or" APB1-4 "is selected. The active display pattern "APW1-3" is selected as the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (blue) of the first hold display immediately before the change becomes the specific display mode of the blue. It is. In the active display pattern "APB1-3", the pending display corresponding to the change is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, for example, the timing when the change starts, and the display mode of the specific display corresponds to the specific display. Since it corresponds to the display mode of the hold display, it is an active display pattern in which the active display area AHA is not caused to display the specific display while the hold display is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H. That is, the active display pattern "APB1-3" is a hold display corresponding to the specific display of the variation, and in the case of the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display, the start winning combination storage display area 5H Is an active display pattern in which the specific display is not displayed (redisplayed) in the active display area AHA.

  Also, for example, the active display pattern “APB1-4” has a yellow color different from the display mode of the blue specific display as the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (blue) of the first hold display immediately before the change. It is an active display pattern selected when it becomes a display mode of the specific display of. In the active display pattern "APB1-4", the pending display corresponding to the change is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, for example, the timing when the change starts, and the display mode of the specific display corresponds to the specific display. Since it is a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the hold display, after the hold display is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, a specific timing after the predetermined timing, for example, decoration of the decorative symbol display area It is an active display pattern displayed in a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display in the active display area AHA at the timing before the symbol becomes the reach mode. That is, the active display pattern "APB1-4" is a hold display corresponding to the specific display of the variation, and is not a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display, from the start winning storage display area 5H. It is an active display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA in a display mode other than the specific display mode corresponding to the display mode by erasing the pending display at a predetermined timing and at the specific timing after the erasing.

Further, for example, when the display mode of the first hold display immediately before the change is blue and the special view display result is “reach”, “APB2−” is displayed as the active display pattern. 4 "," APB2-5 ", or" APB2-6 "is selected.
For example, the active display pattern “APW2-4” is selected when the blue display is specified as the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (blue) of the first hold display immediately before the change. It is a display pattern. In the active display pattern "APB2-4", the pending display corresponding to the change is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, for example, the timing when the change starts, and the display mode of the specific display corresponds to the specific display. Since it corresponds to the display mode of the hold display, it is an active display pattern in which the active display area AHA is not caused to display the specific display while the hold display is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H. That is, the active display pattern "APB2-4" is a hold display corresponding to the specific display of the variation, and in the case of the display form of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display, the start winning combination storage display area 5H Is an active display pattern in which the specific display is not displayed (redisplayed) in the active display area AHA.

  Also, for example, the active display pattern “APB2-5” has a yellow color different from the display mode of the blue specific display as the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (blue) of the first hold display immediately before the change. It is an active display pattern selected when it becomes a display mode of the specific display of. In the active display pattern "APB2-5", the pending display corresponding to the change is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, for example, the timing when the change starts, and the display mode of the specific display corresponds to the specific display. Since it is a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the hold display, after the hold display is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, a specific timing after the predetermined timing, for example, decoration of the decorative symbol display area It is an active display pattern displayed in a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display in the active display area AHA at the timing before the symbol becomes the reach mode. That is, the active display pattern “APB2-5” is a hold display corresponding to the specific display of the variation, and is not a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display, from the start winning storage display area 5H It is an active display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA in a display mode other than the specific display mode corresponding to the display mode by erasing the pending display at a predetermined timing and at the specific timing after the erasing.

  Also, for example, the active display pattern “APB 2-6” is yellow different from the display mode of the blue specific display as the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (blue) of the first hold display immediately before the change. It is an active display pattern selected when it becomes a display mode of the specific display of. In the active display pattern "APB2-6", the pending display corresponding to the change is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, for example, the timing when the change starts, and the display mode of the specific display corresponds to the specific display. Since it is a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the hold display, after deleting the hold display from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, a specific timing after the predetermined timing, for example, of the decorative symbol display area It is an active display pattern displayed in a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display in the active display area AHA at the timing after the decorative symbol has reached the reach mode. That is, the active display pattern “APB 2-6” is a hold display corresponding to the specific display of the variation, and is not a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display, from the start winning storage display area 5H. It is an active display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA in a display mode other than the specific display mode corresponding to the display mode by erasing the pending display at a predetermined timing and at the specific timing after the erasing.

Also, for example, when the display mode of the first hold display immediately before the change is blue and the special view display result is a big hit, “APB3-4”, “APB3” as the active display pattern. One of "-5" and "APB3-6" is selected.
For example, the active display pattern “APB-4” is selected to be a blue specific display as a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (blue) of the first hold display immediately before the change. It is a display pattern. In the active display pattern "APB3-4", the pending display corresponding to the change is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, for example, the timing when the change starts, and the display mode of the specific display corresponds to the specific display. Since it corresponds to the display mode of the hold display, it is an active display pattern in which the active display area AHA is not caused to display the specific display while the hold display is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H. That is, the active display pattern "APB3-4" is a hold display corresponding to the specific display of the variation, and in the case of the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display, the start winning combination storage display area 5H Is an active display pattern in which the specific display is not displayed (redisplayed) in the active display area AHA.

  Also, for example, the active display pattern “APB3-5” has a yellow color different from the display mode of the blue specific display as the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (blue) of the first hold display immediately before the change. It is an active display pattern selected when it becomes a display mode of the specific display of. In the active display pattern "APB3-5", the pending display corresponding to the change is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, for example, the timing when the change starts, and the display mode of the specific display corresponds to the specific display. Since it is a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the hold display, after the hold display is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, a specific timing after the predetermined timing, for example, decoration of the decorative symbol display area It is an active display pattern displayed in a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display in the active display area AHA at the timing before the symbol becomes the reach mode. That is, the active display pattern "APB3-5" is a hold display corresponding to the specific display of the variation, and is not a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display, from the start winning storage display area 5H. It is an active display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA in a display mode other than the specific display mode corresponding to the display mode by erasing the pending display at a predetermined timing and at the specific timing after the erasing.

Also, for example, the active display pattern “APB3-6” has a yellow color different from the display mode of the blue specific display as the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode (blue) of the first hold display immediately before the change. It is an active display pattern selected when it becomes a display mode of the specific display of. In the active display pattern "APB3-6", the pending display corresponding to the change is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, for example, the timing when the change starts, and the display mode of the specific display corresponds to the specific display. Since it is a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the hold display, after deleting the hold display from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, a specific timing after the predetermined timing, for example, of the decorative symbol display area It is an active display pattern displayed in a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display in the active display area AHA at the timing after the decorative symbol has reached the reach mode. That is, the active display pattern "APB3-6" is a hold display corresponding to the specific display of the variation, and is not a display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display, from the start winning storage display area 5H It is an active display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA in a display mode other than the specific display mode corresponding to the display mode by erasing the pending display at a predetermined timing and at the specific timing after the erasing.
The yellow and red active display patterns are the same as white and blue, so the description will be omitted.

  According to FIG. 40, the variation category of the reach is more likely to be displayed in the active display area AHA (more likely to be redisplayed as the particular indication) than the non-reach variation category (not reach) and not hot (for example, normal reach) The specific category is more likely to be displayed in the active display area AHA (more likely to be redisplayed as a specific display) in the case of the variable category in which a reach (for example, super reach) that is hotter than the change category is selected. In addition, at the first timing (for example, timing before reaching), it is easy to be determined to the display mode of lower color such as white and blue, and at the second timing (for example, timing after reaching) after the first timing. It is easy to determine the display mode of upper colors such as yellow and red. In addition, when the display mode of the white specific display is the display mode of the blue specific display, the variation category of "loss (non reach)" or "loss" regardless of whether it is a variation category that is a "big hit" or not. (Leach) even if it is a variation category of the yellow specific display from the display mode of the red specific display, the specific display is easier to be displayed in the active display area AHA, and the yellow specific display is displayed When the display mode of the red specific display is selected from the mode, the specific display is less likely to be displayed in the active display area AHA than when the white specific display mode is the blue specific display mode, but red When it comes to the display mode of the specific display, it is easy for the specific display to be displayed in the active display area AHA when it is a variation category that is a "big hit", and it is believed that it will be a big hit It represents the (expectations) high. That is, the ratio of whether or not the corresponding specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA differs depending on which display mode of the hold display when displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. There is.

  FIG. 41A, FIG. 41B, and FIG. 41C are diagrams showing an example of display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, (a) to (b) in FIG. 41A, (c) to (d) in FIG. 41B (A), (d) to (f) in FIG. 41B (B), and (c) in FIG. In each of (d) to (d), the respective scenes in the image display device 5 are arranged in time series. In each of FIGS. 41A, 41B, and 41C, an arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 indicates that the decorative pattern is changing.

In (a) of FIG. 41A, an active display frame AHW is displayed in the active display area AHA, and a hold display H1, a hold display H2, a hold display H3, and a hold display H4 are displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL. It is a scene. In the active display frame AHW displayed in the predetermined active display area AHA, when the variable display is started, the active display corresponding to the hold display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed.
Here, the active display area AHA is provided, for example, at the lower center of the image display device 5. The active display area AHA is capable of displaying at least an active display, and includes an active display frame AHW surrounding the active display and a predetermined range including the active display frame AHW in addition to the active display. It is also possible to display characters and images in the active display area AHA, such as the active display itself or the inside or outside of the active display frame AHW.

  In addition, immediately before the active display is displayed in the active display area AHA, it is determined at the start winning prize of the hold display H1 as effect contents corresponding to the hold display H1 in the buffer number “1” of the first preread notice buffer 194C. The display mode (display mode "blue" at the time of addition) of the hold display H1 is stored, and the buffer number "2" of the first read advance notice buffer 194C is the content of the hold display H2 as effect contents corresponding to the hold display H2. The display mode (display mode "white" at the time of addition) of the hold display H2 determined at the start winning combination is stored, and the buffer number "3" of the first read advance notice buffer 194C corresponds to the hold content corresponding to the hold display H3. The display mode (display mode at the time of addition "white") of the hold display H3 determined at the start winning combination of the hold display H3 is stored, and the first read advance notice buffer 1 The display mode (display mode "white" at the time of addition) of the hold display H4 determined at the start winning combination of the hold display H4 is stored in buffer number "4" of 4C as effect contents corresponding to the hold display H4. It shall be.

  The scene of (a) of FIG. 41A is a scene in which the decorative symbols (“3”, “9” and “4”) of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are stopped and displayed in the variable display corresponding to the hold display H0 is there.

  In the scene of FIG. 41A (b) after (a) of FIG. 41A, when the variable display corresponding to the suspension display H1 displayed in the first start winning a prize storage display area 5HL is started, the effect control CPU 120 This is an example when the variation of the decorative pattern is started based on the variation pattern "PA3-1 (reach (loss))" designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11. For example, in the scene of (b) of FIG. 41A, the specific display AH corresponding to the hold display H1 is a scene displayed in the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display H1 in the active display area AHA. For example, it is assumed that the hold display H1 is displayed in a blue display mode in the scene of (a) of FIG. 41A. At this time, the hold display H1 is erased from the first start winning storage display area 5HL, and each other hold display (hold display H2, hold display H3, hold display H4) other than the hold display H1 is on the right (active display area AHA Side is shifted and displayed.

The scene of (c) of FIG. 41B (A) after (b) of FIG. 41A is a decorative symbol in the variation corresponding to the specific indication AH corresponding to the suspension display H1 started in the scene of (b) of FIG. The decorative pattern "7" of the display area 5L and the decorative pattern display area 5R is a scene displayed in the reach mode. At this time, the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5C is in the process of change.
Also, in the scene (d) of FIG. 41B (A), the start winning storage display area 5H is displayed as the hold display H1 at the timing after the decoration symbol is displayed in the reach mode in the decoration symbol display areas 5L and 5R. In the scene where the specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA in the display mode (the second display mode) of the specific display different from the display mode (the first display mode) of the specific display corresponding to the display mode when is there.

On the other hand, the scene of (c) of FIG. 41B (B) after (b) of FIG. 41A started in the scene of (b) of FIG. 41A similarly to the scene of (d) of FIG. In the variation corresponding to the specific display AH corresponding to the hold display H1, the decorative symbol "7" of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol display area 5R is displayed in a reach mode. At this time, the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5C is in the process of change.
Further, in the scene of (d) of FIG. 41B (B), as in the scene of (d) of FIG. 41B (A), the timing after the ornamental symbol is displayed in the reach mode in the ornamental pattern display areas 5L and 5R. Active in the same display manner (first display manner) as the display manner (first display manner) of the specific display corresponding to the display manner when the start winning storage display area 5H is displayed as the hold indication H1. This is a scene in which the specific display is displayed in the display area AHA.

The scene of (e) of FIG. 41B (B) after the scene of (d) of FIG. 41B (B) is the first display mode in the active display area AHA in the scene of (d) of FIG. It is a scene when the specific display is deleted from the active display area AHA at a timing after the display of the displayed specific display AH in the reach pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R.
And the scene of (f) of FIG. 41B (B) after (e) of FIG. 41B (B) is the specific display erased from the active display area AHA in the scene of (e) of FIG. 41B (B) These are scenes when displayed in the active display area AHA in a display mode (second display mode) of a specific display different from the display mode (first display mode) of the specific display before erasure.

On the other hand, the scene of (d) of FIG. 41C (C) after (b) of FIG. 41A is the same as the scene of (c) of FIG. 41B (A) or the scene of (c) of FIG. In the variation corresponding to the specific display AH corresponding to the suspension display H1 started in the scene of (b) of FIG. 41A, the decorative symbol "7" of the decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol display area 5R is displayed in reach mode The scene is At this time, the decorative symbol of the decorative symbol display area 5C is in the process of change.
Further, in the scene of (d) of FIG. 41C (C), as in the scene of (d) of FIG. 41C (C), the timing after the ornamental symbol is displayed in the reach mode in the ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R. And the display mode (first display mode) of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display H1 when displayed as the hold display H1 in the start winning storage display area 5H, and thus specified in the active display area AHA This is a scene in which the display is not displayed and the hold display H1 corresponding to the specific display AH is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H.

  Thus, according to FIG. 41A, FIG. 41B, and FIG. 41C, when starting the change, the pending display corresponding to the change is started from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing, for example, simultaneously with the start of the change or When it is a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the temporary display and the display mode when the temporary display is displayed, the specific display mode is the predetermined display mode in which the temporary display is erased. In the display mode of the hold display when the hold display is displayed at a specific timing after the timing, for example, the timing before displaying the decoration pattern in the reach mode or the timing after displaying the decoration pattern in the reach mode Active display area for specific display in the display mode (second display mode) of the specific display different from the display mode (first display mode) of the corresponding specific display When the display mode of the specific display is displayed (re-displayed) on the HA and the display mode of the specific display corresponds to the display mode (first display mode) of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display, the hold display is erased at a predetermined timing. Since the specific display is not displayed (redisplayed) in the active display area AHA later, it is possible to easily recognize that the display mode of the specific display changes (the change has occurred), and it is possible to improve the player's interest .

  In the display operation example in the image display device 5 shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, after the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach pattern in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, it is deleted after being displayed in the active display area AHA. Although the example which displays the specific display of the 2nd display mode which is a display mode different from the specific display of the 1st display mode was displayed on active display area AHA, the decorative symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display area in reach mode The specific display of the second display mode may be displayed in the active display area AHA at a timing before the display.

  In the display operation example in the image display device 5 shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, after the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach pattern in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, it is deleted after being displayed in the active display area AHA. Although the example which displays the specific display of the 2nd display mode which is a display mode different from the specific display of the 1st display mode in active display area AHA was explained, also to the change of the non reach which does not become a reach mode The specific display of the second display mode may be displayed in the active display area AHA at a timing after the decorative pattern to be reached is displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R.

  In the display operation example in the image display device 5 shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, after the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach pattern in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, it is deleted after being displayed in the active display area AHA. Although the example which displays the specific display of the 2nd display mode which is a display mode different from the specific display of the 1st display mode in active display area AHA was explained, in the mode which becomes non reach which a decorative design does not become a reach mode. The specific display of the second display mode may be displayed in the active display area AHA at a timing before the decorative pattern is displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R.

Also in the display operation example in the image display device 5 shown in FIGS. 41A, 41B and 41C, it is possible to combine active display change presentation and specific display change presentation as shown in FIGS. 32 to 39B. is there.
The setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the specific display by the display mode determination table of the specific display shown in FIG. 40 and the determination ratio of the display mode of the specific display by the display mode determination table of the specific display shown in FIG. Taking the setting example as the setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the specific display by the display mode determination table of one large specific display, in the first hold effect determination process in step S160, etc., FIG. The first hold display displayed in the display mode at the time of addition based on the display mode at the time of addition determined based on any of the hold display mode determination table and the display mode determination random number MR6 for the first hold display To display in the active display area AHA a specific display corresponding to the variable display to be executed based on the establishment of the start condition of the hold information corresponding to the A When to clear the specific display displayed on AHA, whether or not the deleted specific display is redisplayed on the active display area AHA, and how to display the specific display when redisplaying the specific display on the active display area AHA A process of determining with reference to a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the specific display by the display mode determination table of the specific display as shown in 26 may be executed.

  In the present modification, when the first hold display or the second hold display is not displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the image display device 5 When variable display of symbols is not performed, the first hold display or the second hold display by the first start winning combination or the second start winning combination is once displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second start winning storage display After being displayed in the area 5HR, the first hold display or the second hold display is displayed on the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second based on the start of the variable display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display. The display mode of the specific display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display erased from the start winning storage display area 5HR is the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display When a different specific display of the display mode, to display a particular display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display in the active display area AHA.

  In addition, when the first hold display or the second hold display is not displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second start winning storage display area 5HR, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the image display device 5 is When not being performed, the first hold display or the second hold display corresponding to the first hold information or the second hold information by the first start winning or the second start winning is the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second [2] Based on starting variable display corresponding to the first hold information or the second hold information without being displayed in the start winning storage display area 5HR, identification corresponding to the first hold information or the second hold information When the display mode of the display is a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display, the specification corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display Acte the display It may be in the display in blanking the display area AHA.

In this modification, the first hold display or the second hold display when the first hold display or the second hold display is displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second start winning storage display area 5HR. And the specific display is different from the first display mode corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display. Even if the display mode (the second display mode) of the specific display is not displayed, the display of the first hold display when it is displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second start winning storage display area 5HR More than the normal display mode, such as the display mode (for example, the display mode of the blue, yellow, red hold display) different from the normal display mode (for example, the display mode of the white hold display) Upper display mode If so, the first hold display field second hold display is erased at a predetermined timing from the first start winning memory display area 5HL and the second start winning memory display area 5HR, and the first hold display field second hold display is performed at a specific timing after the predetermined timing. The specific display of one display mode may be displayed on the active display area AHA.
As a result, when the display mode when the display is on hold is a display mode higher than the normal display mode, the player's sense of expectation for a specific gaming state such as a big hit can be improved.

(Second modification)
The display mode of the hold display does not have to be the display mode representing the degree of expectation for the big hit as shown in FIG. 25 and is different from the normal mode which is the normal (default, initial color) display mode. The special aspect may include the first special aspect and the second special aspect which are aspects different from the ordinary aspect and the special aspect. This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 42, 43, and 44.

For example, instead of the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 25, another setting example of the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 42 may be used.
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing another setting example of the determination rate of the display mode of the hold display. The ROM 121 may store seven types of pending display mode determination tables according to the change category. FIG. 42 (A) shows the pending display mode selected when the variation category "PA1 (shortened / not reached lost)" or the variation category "PA2 (not reached (missed))" among the seven types described above. It is a setting example (H-TBL1) of the determination ratio of the display mode of a pending | holding display by a determination table. FIG. 42 (B) is a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the suspension display by the suspension display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA3 (normal reach (loss))” among the seven types described above ( H-TBL2). FIG. 42C shows the setting of the display rate determination ratio of the hold display by the hold display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA4 (super reach α (loss))” among the seven types described above. An example (H-TBL3).

  FIG. 42D shows a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the suspension display by the suspension display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PA5 (super reach β (loss))” among the above seven types. 42E shows the display of the pending display by the pending display mode determination table selected when the variation category is “PB 3 (normal reach (big hit))” among the above-mentioned seven types. Fig. 42F is a setting example (H-TBL5) of the determination ratio of the aspect, and Fig. 42 (F) is a suspension selected when the variation category is "PB4 (super reach α (big hit))" among the above seven types It is a setting example (H-TBL6) of the determination ratio of the display mode of the suspension display by a display mode determination table. (G) of FIG. It is a setting example (H-TBL7) of the determination ratio of the display mode of a pending | holding display by the pending | holding display mode determination table selected when it is (beta) (big hit).

  When FIG. 42 and FIG. 25 are compared, a point that a part of the determination ratio with respect to "white" in each reservation display mode determination table in FIG. 25 is allocated to "grey" in FIG. 42 is different. Specifically, the determination ratio for “white” in each suspension display mode determination table is 4: 1 for the “white” determination ratio and “gray” for each suspension display mode determination table in FIG. 42. It is a setting example to which the determination ratio is assigned. In this setting example, “white” is a display mode (normal mode) of a normal hold display, and “gray” is a special mode different from the normal mode. The special mode is the active mode that changes the display mode of the active display (specific display) when the “gray” stop display becomes the active display (specific display) although the normal mode and the expectation for the big hit are the same. It is a display mode showing that the rate which performs display change production (specific display change production, specific production) is high.

  In addition, unlike the normal aspect and the special aspect, the setting example has a different expectation for the big hit (for example, blue, which is the first special aspect, a high expectation for the big hit than the normal aspect and the special aspect), Unlike the aspect and the special aspect, the second special aspect yellow which is different in the expectation for the big hit (for example, the high expectation for the big hit than the first special aspect), and different from the ordinary aspect and the special aspect A third special aspect such as red, which has a different degree of expectation (for example, a higher expectation for a big hit than the second special aspect) may be included.

  For example, in the first holding effect determination process (step S160) of FIG. 24, the effect control CPU 120 sets a plurality of items shown in FIG. 42 based on the change category designated by the change category command transmitted from the main substrate 11. The hold display mode determination table to be used is selected from the hold display mode decision table, and the first start winning combination display area is selected based on the selected hold display mode decision table and the random number MR6 for display mode decision of the hold display. The display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display to be additionally displayed on 5HL may be determined.

  Then, after executing the first hold effect determination process (step S160) in FIG. 24, the effect control CPU 120 stores the determination content of the first hold effect determination process based on the determination result of the first hold effect determination process. (Step S161). Specifically, for example, the CPU 120 for effect control first displays the display mode of the hold display in the first hold effect determination process, the first corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A. The determination content (the display mode at the time of addition) of the first holding effect determination process is stored in association with the buffer number of the prefetch notice buffer 194C.

  Then, after executing the process of step S161 of FIG. 24, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display mode of the hold display determined in the first hold effect determination process (step S160) (in the first start winning reception command buffer 194A). Based on the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the first prefetch notice buffer 194C corresponding to the buffer number of the first start winning, a new hold display in the first start winning storage display area 5HL Is executed (step S162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 causes the first start winning storage display area 5HL to display a hold display according to the addition display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the above-described first read advance notice buffer 194C. By setting a control pattern as a usage pattern and transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like, the first hold effect is provided. A hold display according to the addition display mode determined in the determination process is added to the first start winning storage display area 5HL.

  Then, in the process of step S532 in the effect execution setting process of FIG. 27, it is determined whether or not to execute the active display change presentation (specific display change presentation, specific presentation) on the active display (specific display) corresponding to the change. Processing or processing to determine which active display change presentation is to be performed when active display change presentation is performed, and active display change to be performed when the active display change presentation is to be performed (active display change) A process of determining the effect mode of the effect, a process of determining the timing of executing the active display change effect in the variation, and a process of setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on the selection result of the active display change effect Etc.

  Here, the effect execution setting process (step S532) of FIG. 27 will be described in detail. First, a process of determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect (specific display change effect, specific effect) for the active display (specific display) corresponding to the change, and when performing the active display change effect, which active A process of determining whether to execute the display change effect will be described. When using the determination ratio of the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 42, the active display change presentation execution presence / absence decision table shown in FIG. 43 may be used instead of the active display change presentation execution presence / absence decision table shown in FIG. . Here, the setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 28 and the setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. Depending on whether the display mode of the display is a special mode, the point of referring to the setting example of the determination ratio by another active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table differs.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing another setting example of the determination ratio based on the active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table. Specifically, FIG. 43A shows the determination ratio of the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table to be referred to when the display mode of the active display (specific display) corresponding to the change is not the special mode (gray) It is a setting example, and FIG. 43 (B) is a setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table referred to when the display mode of the active display corresponding to the said change is a special aspect (gray) is there.
In each of the setting examples shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B, whether or not to execute the active display change effect (specific display change effect, specific effect) as in the setting example shown in FIG. It is a setting example of the determination ratio of the production | presentation aspect of active display change presentation (specific display change presentation, specific presentation) when performing active display change presentation.
In each setting example shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B, in the active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table, the disturbance for determining the presence / absence of execution of the active display change presentation (specific display change presentation, specific presentation) The numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the numerical value MR7 (not shown) are determined as shown in FIGS. 43 (A) and 43 (B) for each of “execution available” and “execution non-existent”. Allocated in proportions. Further, in “active” of the active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR7 (not shown) for active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination is “first system Decisions as shown in FIG. 43 (A) and FIG. 43 (B) for each of “change presentation”, “second system change presentation”, and “first system change presentation and second system change presentation” Allocated in proportions.

  In addition, "execution yes" "first system change production" indicates that the first system change production is performed as an active display change presentation, "execution yes" "second system change presentation" is the second system change production "Execute" and "1st system change effect and 2nd system change effect" represent the effect of performing as an active display change effect. Indicates that the effect is to be made. Also, "execution not performed" indicates that the active display change effect is not performed. Further, fluctuation pattern 1-X represents fluctuation pattern PA1-1 shown in FIG. 5, and fluctuation pattern PA2-X represents any of fluctuation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2 and PA2-3 shown in FIG. The fluctuation pattern PA3-X represents one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 illustrated in FIG. 5, and the fluctuation pattern PA4 represents the fluctuation pattern PA4-1, PA4-2, and PA4-3 illustrated in FIG. It represents any of PA4-4. The same applies to the variation patterns PA5-X, PB4-X, and PB5-X.

  According to FIG. 43, when the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern) of the fluctuation (variable display pattern) designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern PA1-X or PA2-X, "not executed" is 100. %, Indicating that neither the first system change effect, the second system change effect, the first system change effect nor the second system change effect is executed. Moreover, when performing an active display change presentation (in the case of "execution" in FIG. 43 (A) and FIG. 43 (B)), when it becomes hot reach (for example, super reach), reach that is not hot (for example, normal reach) The ratio at which the first system change effect is performed is higher than that at the time when the second system change effect is performed. In addition, when the variation pattern is "big hit", the rate at which the first system change effect is performed is higher than that at the second system change effect, as compared with the case where the "losing" occurs. In addition, when it is a hot reach (for example, super reach), the rate at which both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are performed is higher than when it is not a hot reach (for example, normal reach). ing. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is "big hit", the ratio in which both the first system change effect and the second system change effect are performed is higher than when the change pattern is "loss".

In addition, depending on whether or not the active display corresponding to the change is a special mode, the determination ratio of the presence or absence of the active display change effect differs, and in the case where the active display corresponding to the change is a special mode, the change The determination rate at which the active display change effect is performed is higher than when the active display corresponding to is not the special mode.
Further, in the case where the special mode as shown in FIG. 28 is not considered and in the case where the active display corresponding to the variation is not the special mode in consideration of the special mode as shown in FIG. If the active display corresponding to the fluctuation is a special mode in consideration of the special mode as shown in FIG. 43, the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. The determination ratio at which the active display change presentation is performed is higher in the order of the determination ratio by the active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 28 and the determination ratio by the active display change presentation execution presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. ing.

  That is, in the effect execution setting process of FIG. 27 (step S532), the effect control CPU 120 uses the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table, the random value MR7 for determining whether the active display change presentation is performed, and the fluctuation pattern designation command. Whether or not to execute the active display change effect according to the fluctuation pattern (variable display pattern) of the specified fluctuation (the variable display), in the case of executing the active display change effect, a plurality of active display change effects Of the effect modes, it is determined which active display change effect is to be performed.

  In addition, CPU120 for production control first decides execution presence or absence of active indication change production, when it decides with “execution yes” “first system change presentation” or “second system change presentation” or “first system change presentation” And “the second system change effect” may be determined.

  The figure group Y1 displayed as the first system change effect may be determined so that the degree of expectation for the big hit changes depending on the combination of the figures forming the figure group Y1. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of setting of the determination ratio by the first system detailed pattern determination table at the time of the first system change effect execution.
In each setting example shown in FIG. 44, the first system detailed pattern determination table for the first system change effect includes, for example, 10 types of first system detailed patterns SHP1 corresponding to a combination of three figures of triangle, pentagon and star. SHP 10 is included. When only the first system change effect is executed (when any one of the active display change effect patterns BP1 to BP4 in FIG. 29A is determined), the first system detailed pattern is selected. It is referred to when performing both of the second system change rendition (when any of the active display change rendition patterns AP1 to AP12 of FIG. 29C is determined).

  In this first system detailed pattern, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number MR8 (not shown) for determining the first system detailed pattern is determined by the active display change effect pattern as shown in FIG. It is assigned.

  In addition, it is assumed that the first system detailed pattern as the effect aspect of the 10 types of first system change effects according to the 16 types of active display change effect patterns shown in FIG. 29 is stored in the ROM 121.

  In FIG. 44, the first system detailed pattern “SHP1” is an effect pattern when all three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are configured by triangles. According to the illustrated example, when AP1 to AP3 and BP1 have a high determination ratio determined when reaching a non-hot reach (for example, normal reach) in FIG. 29, when becoming a non-hot reach (for example, normal reach), The determination rate determined in the first system detailed pattern SHP1 is higher than when it is a hot reach (for example, a super reach). Further, the display mode of the active display (specific display) corresponding to the change is determined according to the active display change effect pattern determined in FIG. 29, and the active display (specific display) corresponding to the determined change. A first system detailed pattern that can be a display mode is determined.

Similarly, the first system detailed pattern "SHP2" is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of a pentagon, triangle or triangle, and the first system detail pattern "SHP3" is a figure The effect pattern when the three figures forming the group Y1 are composed of pentagons, pentagons and triangles, and the first system detailed pattern "SHP4" is a pentagon, pentagon and pentagon of three figures forming the figure group Y1. The first system detailed pattern "SHP5" is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of a star, a triangle, and a triangle, the first system detailed pattern "SHP5". The detail pattern “SHP6” is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of a star, a pentagon, and a triangle, and the first system detail pattern “SH 7 is an effect pattern when the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of a star, a pentagon, and a pentagon, and in the first system detailed pattern "SHP8", the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are It is an effect pattern when it is composed of stars, stars, triangles, triangles, and the first system detailed pattern "SHP9" is an effect when the three figures constituting figure group Y1 are composed of stars, stars, pentagons The first system detailed pattern “SHP10” is a pattern, and is an effect pattern when all of the three figures constituting the figure group Y1 are composed of stars.
According to the illustrated example, the degree of expectation with which the successful effect can be performed differs depending on the combination of the figures forming the figure group Y1.

When considering the special mode as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the active display change effect (specific display change effect, specific to the active display (specific display) corresponding to the pending display displayed in the special mode The common effect described above may be performed as a suggested effect that suggests a success effect and a failure effect when performing the effect), or an active display (specific display) corresponding to a pending display displayed in a special mode Indication effect that suggests active display change effect (specific display change effect) for (for example, indication effect (specific display display mode that indicates common effect performed in common with success effect and failure effect) is displayed or not It is also possible to execute (indicating) a specific effect (indicating whether or not the display mode of the specific display changes) in the same or different mode.
In the case of considering the special mode as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the description has been given of the active display change effect (specific display change effect, specific effect) with respect to the active display (specific display). Is the same as or different from the active display change effect (specific display change effect, specific effect, suggestion effect) with respect to the pending display displayed in the special mode when the display mode of the pending display displayed on the special mode is displayed. The on-hold change presentation (on-hold display change presentation) may be executed.

  In FIG. 44, among the graphic group Y1 configured by initial display (combination), the graphic to be deleted in the common effect may be deleted from the graphic serving as the display mode of the active display with a low degree of expectation. For example, when the first system detailed pattern SHP6 is determined as the success effect, a display mode after the success effect is executed in a group of figures composed of three figures of "star", "pentagon" and "triangle". Of the two figures other than the figure (eg, "pentagon"), the figure with the low degree of expectation (eg, "triangle") is erased first, and the figure with the lowest degree of expectation (eg, "star") is erased If it is a failure effect, it is in the order of "triangle", "pentagon" and "star" out of a group of figures consisting of "star", "pentagon" and "triangle". You may make it erase | eliminate.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, after the game medium passes through the start area (for example, the first start winning opening, the second start winning opening, etc.) provided in the game area, the variable display (for example, special drawing The variable display of the identification information is executed based on the establishment of the start condition that allows the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol, etc. A gaming machine (e.g., a player who controls the game to a specific gaming state (e.g., a big hit gaming state, a probability changing state, a time saving state, etc.) which is advantageous for the player when the specific display result is derived and displayed as a decorative symbol Hold storage means (for example, the first feature) for storing hold information for variable display of identification information in which the game medium has passed the start area but the start condition of the variable display is not satisfied; Charter Storage unit 151A, second special view suspension storage unit 151B, first start winning reception command buffer 194A, second startup winning reception command buffer 194B, etc.) and the suspension information stored in the suspension storage unit On the other hand, pending display means for performing pending display (for example, processing for adding the pending display to the first start winning storage display area 5HL in the first pending addition process in step S162, and second starting in the second pending addition process in step S165) Specific display corresponding to the variable display to be executed (for example, predetermined hold display corresponding to the variable display) based on the process of adding the hold display to the winning storage display area 5HR and the start condition being satisfied. According to the active display (specific display) displayed in the active display area AHA and the active display corresponding to the variable display A special image or the like representing information is provided in a predetermined area (for example, the active display area AHA (the active display area AHA is provided, for example, at the lower center of the image display device 5). , An active display frame surrounding the active display, an area including a predetermined range including the active display frame, and the like, and specific display means (for example, the first hold effect determination process of step S160 and the step S163) Of the hold display mode determination table to be used from among the plurality of hold display mode decision tables based on the variation category in the second hold effect determination process of 2, and for the display mode decision of the selected hold display mode decision table and the hold display Start winning memory display area 5H based on the random number value MR6 of Based on the process of determining the display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display to be additionally displayed, and that the start condition of the hold information corresponding to the hold display displayed at the display mode at the time of addition is satisfied. The specific display corresponding to the variable display performed based on is displayed in the active display area AHA, the timing when the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA is erased, and the erased specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA Whether to display or not, the timing of displaying the specific display when displaying the deleted specific display in the active display area AHA, the display mode of the specific display when displaying the specific display in the active display area AHA, etc. The active display pattern is selected, and the active display selected in the variable display start setting process of step S171 And the like (a process of setting a specific display in the active display area AHA, an active display pattern including effects to be displayed, deleted, redisplayed, etc.), and the specific display means performs the first display mode For example, the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the suspension display when displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL or the second start winning storage display area 5HR, and the like, and the first display mode Is different from the second display mode (for example, the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the display mode of the hold display when displayed in the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the second start winning memory display area 5HR And the specific display corresponding to the variable display to be executed based on the fact that the start condition is satisfied. Predetermined timing after displaying the specific display of the first display mode in the predetermined area (for example, timing immediately after the start of variable display, variable display is started, and The timing after a predetermined time has passed from when the decoration pattern is stopped in the reach mode or non-reach mode in the decoration pattern display area 5L, 5R, the timing before the decoration pattern is stopped, the reach mode or non reach in the decoration pattern display area 5L, 5R The specific display is erased at the timing after the decoration symbol is stopped in the mode, the timing before the chance symbol is stopped in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the timing before the chance symbol is stopped in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, etc.) A specific timing after the predetermined timing (for example, a predetermined time has elapsed since variable display after the predetermined timing is started The timing after the start, the timing before the decorative symbol is stopped in the reach pattern or the non-reach aspect in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R after the predetermined timing, and the decorative symbol display area 5L after the predetermined timing 5R, the timing after the decoration pattern is stopped in reach mode or non-reach mode, the timing before the chance symbol is stopped in the pseudo-series change after the predetermined timing, the pseudo-series after the predetermined timing The specific display of the second display mode can be displayed in the predetermined area in the timing before the chance symbol is stopped in the fluctuation, etc., and the specific display result (for example, a big hit game as a display result of the variable display to be executed) When a decorative symbol or the like corresponding to becoming a state is derived and displayed, the specific display result is not derived and displayed To view a specific display of the second display form in the predetermined region at a higher rate than.

  According to such a configuration, when the specific display result is derived and displayed, the gaming machine 1 displays the specific display of the second display mode in the predetermined area at a higher rate than when the specific display result is not derived and displayed. Since it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation for the specific display result by the display mode of the specific display displayed in the predetermined area, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  Further, for example, even when using the technology described in Patent Document 1, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the display mode of the display at the time of digestion has changed, and as a result, the interest of the player may be reduced. It is an object of one aspect of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of making it easy for a player to recognize that the display mode of the display at the time of digestion has changed, and improving the player's interest. Since the machine erases the specific display when the display mode of the specific display changes and displays the specific display of the second display mode different from the first display mode, the display mode of the specific display has changed It can be made easy for the player to recognize, and the sense of expectation for the specific display result can be effectively improved. Also, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the above-mentioned gaming machine 1, a specific display change effect (for example, an active display change effect, a specific display change) for changing the display mode of the specific display displayed in the predetermined area by the specific display means in the second display mode. Specific display change effect executing means (for example, the first hold effect determination process in step S160, etc.) for executing an effect (a main notice effect or the like) for changing the active display (specific display) such as the effect to the notice mode (2) A process for determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect on a specific display corresponding to the change in the process for setting a hold effect, a process for setting execution in step S532, or a process for changing an active display when executing an active display change effect Processing to determine the type of effect, Active table change Active table when performing effects The process of determining the effect mode of the change effect, the process of determining the execution timing of the active display change effect when executing the active display change effect, and setting (or resetting) the effect control pattern based on the determination results Processing to set the active display pattern including the display mode and the redisplay timing of the specific display at the time of changing the display mode of the specific display and the display mode of the specific display and changing the display mode of the specific display and redisplaying after erasing the specific display And the like).

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine 1 can change the specific display displayed in the second display mode, the player can see even after the specific display of the second display mode is displayed. The expectation of can be improved.

  Further, in the above-described gaming machine 1, the specific display means is configured to display a plurality of timings (for example, timings before the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach pattern in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). The timing after the decoration pattern is displayed in the reach mode, the timing before the chance symbol is displayed in the pseudo continuous change, the timing after the chance symbol is displayed in the pseudo continuous change, etc.) The specific display of the second display mode is displayed in the predetermined area, and the ratio at which the specific display of the second display mode is controlled to the specific gaming state is different according to the timing at which the specific display of the second display mode is displayed in the predetermined area May be

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine 1 can focus attention on the timing at which the specific display of the second display mode is displayed in the predetermined area, and can improve the player's sense of expectation.

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 1, the specific change effect executing means differs from the second display mode in the display mode of the specific display displayed by the specific display means in the second display mode in the predetermined area. The specific display change effect (for example, active display change effect, specific display change effect, etc. active display (specific display) to change to a third display mode, etc. is changed to a notice mode (main notice effect), etc.) is executed You may do so.

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine 1 can further change the specific display of the second display mode to the specific display of the third display mode, the specific display of the second display mode is displayed. Even after the game, the player's expectation can be improved.

  Further, in the above-described gaming machine 1, a plurality of timings during variable display (for example, timing before the ornamental symbol is displayed in the reach aspect in the ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R, reach aspect to the ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R The display of the specific display at any timing among the timing after the decoration symbol is displayed, the timing before the chance symbol is displayed in the pseudo continuous variation, the timing after the chance symbol is displayed in the pseudo continuous variation, etc. Specification that executes specific effects (for example, first system change effect, second system change effect, first system change effect and second system change effect, suggestion effect, specific effect, etc.) indicating whether or not the mode changes The system further comprises an effect execution unit, and the specific display change effect execution unit is configured such that the specific effect execution unit is any of the plurality of timings. The ratio of whether or not the display mode of the specific display of the second display mode is changed may be different depending on whether the specific effect is executed in the ring (for example, the first timing (for example, the timing before reaching) ), It is easy to determine the display mode of lower colors such as white and blue, and the display mode of upper colors such as yellow and red at the second timing (for example, timing after reaching) after the first timing It may be easy to determine the

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine 1 can pay attention to the execution timing of the specific effect which suggests whether or not the display mode of the specific display of the second display mode changes, and the player's interest is It can be improved.

  Further, in the above-described gaming machine 1, the hold display means may display a first hold display mode (for example, a display mode of a hold display displayed in a white display mode in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, The display mode of the hold display displayed in the blue display mode in the start winning storage display area 5HL, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the white display mode in the second start win storage display area 5HR, and the second start winning A display mode of the hold display displayed in blue display mode in the memory display area 5HR or a second hold display mode different from the first hold display mode (for example, yellow in the first start winning storage display area 5HL) The display mode of the hold display displayed in the display mode of 1, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the red display mode in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the second start win storage display area 5 The hold display is displayed in the display mode of the hold display displayed in yellow in R or in the display mode of the hold display displayed in red in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, etc.) The display means may change the ratio of displaying the specific display of the second display mode in the predetermined area according to the display mode of the hold display displayed by the hold display means (for example, the first start-up) It is displayed in the active display area AHA as the display of the corresponding specific display depending on which is the display mode of the hold display when being displayed in the winning storage display area 5HL or the second start winning storage display area 5HR. After the specific display is deleted, the ratio of whether or not to be displayed in the active display area AHA in the display mode of the specific display different from the display mode before the deletion, etc. In may be).

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine 1 can pay attention to the hold display mode of the hold display before the specific display of the first display mode is displayed in the predetermined area. It can be improved.

  In addition, the gaming machine 1 according to the above embodiment changes the display (e.g., special drawing) after the game medium passes through the starting area (e.g., the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, etc.) provided in the gaming area. The variable display of the identification information is executed based on the establishment of the start condition that allows the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol, etc. A gaming machine (e.g., a player who controls the game to a specific gaming state (e.g., a big hit gaming state, a probability changing state, a time saving state, etc.) which is advantageous for the player when the specific display result is derived and displayed as a decorative symbol Hold storage means (for example, the first feature) for storing hold information for variable display of identification information in which the game medium has passed the start area but the start condition of the variable display is not satisfied; Charter Storage unit 151A, second special view suspension storage unit 151B, first start winning reception command buffer 194A, second startup winning reception command buffer 194B, etc.) and the suspension information stored in the suspension storage unit On the other hand, pending display means for performing pending display (for example, processing for adding the pending display to the first start winning storage display area 5HL in the first pending addition process in step S162, and second starting in the second pending addition process in step S165) A process of adding a hold display to the winning storage display area 5HR, etc.) and a specific display result (for example, a decorative symbol corresponding to becoming a big hit gaming state) are displayed as a display result of the variable display where the start condition is satisfied. Specific display corresponding to the variable display performed at a higher rate than when the specific display result is not derived and displayed (example For example, an active display (specific display) in which a hold display corresponding to the variable display is displayed in a predetermined active display area AHA, a special image representing information corresponding to the active display corresponding to the variable display, etc. For example, an active display area AHA (an active display area AHA is provided, for example, at the lower center of the image display device 5, at least an active display is displayed in the active display area AHA, and the active display is enclosed in addition to the active display). Specific display means (for example, the first hold effect determination process in step S160 and the second hold effect determination process in step S163) to be displayed on an active display frame or an area including a predetermined range including the active display frame Use from among multiple pending display mode decision tables based on The display mode of the suspension display to be additionally displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H based on the selected suspension display mode determination table and the random number MR6 for the display mode determination of the suspension display selected Based on the process of determining the display mode at the time of addition and the display mode at the time of addition, on the variable display executed based on the start condition of the hold information corresponding to the hold display displayed in the display mode at the addition time The corresponding hold display is deleted from the start winning storage display area 5H, and whether the specific display corresponding to the deleted hold display is displayed in the active display area AHA, or the specific display corresponding to the deleted hold display is the active display area Whether to display (re-display) on the AHA or to display a specific display corresponding to the deleted display on the active display area AHA as a specific table The active display pattern selected in the variable display start setting process in step S171 (specific display pattern (specific display pattern) is selected in the variable display start setting process in step S171. And (e.g., setting an active display pattern including an effect to display in the active display area AHA).

  According to such a configuration, when the specific display result is derived and displayed, the gaming machine 1 can display the specific display in the predetermined area at a higher rate than when the specific display result is not derived and displayed. Since the player's sense of expectation for the specific display result can be effectively improved depending on whether the specific display is displayed in the predetermined area, the player's interest can be improved.

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 1, a specific display change effect executing means (for example, an active display change effect, a specific, etc.) for executing a specific display change effect for changing the display mode of the specific display displayed in the predetermined area by the specific display means. Specific display change effect executing means (for example, the first hold effect determination process in step S160, step S163, etc.) for executing an effect (a main advance effect effect, etc.) for changing active display (specific display) such as display change effect into notice mode. Processing for determining whether or not to execute an active display change effect for a specific display corresponding to the change in the second hold effect determination process in step S532 or the effect execution setting process in step S532, and an active process for executing an active display change effect Processing to determine the type of display change effect, when performing active display change effect The process of determining the effect mode of the active display change effect, the process of determining the execution timing of the active display change effect when executing the active display change effect, setting (or resetting the effect control pattern based on these determination results ) Set the active display pattern including the display mode and the redisplay timing of the specific display at the time of changing the display mode of the specific display and the display mode of the specific display when changing the display mode of the specific display and the specific display. And the like) may be further included.

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine 1 can change the display mode of the displayed specific display, the player's sense of expectation can be improved even after the specific display is displayed. .

  Further, in the above-described gaming machine 1, the specific display means is configured to display a plurality of timings (for example, timings before the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach pattern in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). The timing after the decoration pattern is displayed in the reach mode, the timing before the chance symbol is displayed in the pseudo continuous change, the timing after the chance symbol is displayed in the pseudo continuous change, etc.) A specific indication may be displayed in the predetermined area, and the ratio at which the specific gaming state is controlled may be different according to the timing at which the specific indication is displayed in the predetermined area.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine 1 can focus attention on the timing at which the specific display is displayed in the predetermined area, and can improve the expectation of the player.

  Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 1, the specific change effect performing means changes the display mode of the specific display displayed in the predetermined area by the specific display means (for example, active display change effect, specific) An effect (main notice effect) or the like may be executed to change an active display (specific display) such as a display change effect to a notice mode.

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine 1 can change the display mode of the specific display, the player's sense of expectation can be improved even after the specific display is displayed.

  Further, in the above-described gaming machine 1, a plurality of timings during variable display (for example, timing before the ornamental symbol is displayed in the reach aspect in the ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R, reach aspect to the ornamental symbol display areas 5L and 5R The display of the specific display at any timing among the timing after the decoration symbol is displayed, the timing before the chance symbol is displayed in the pseudo continuous variation, the timing after the chance symbol is displayed in the pseudo continuous variation, etc. Specification that executes specific effects (for example, first system change effect, second system change effect, first system change effect and second system change effect, suggestion effect, specific effect, etc.) indicating whether or not the mode changes The system further comprises an effect execution unit, and the specific display change effect execution unit is configured such that the specific effect execution unit is any of the plurality of timings. The ratio of whether or not the display mode of the specific display changes may be different depending on whether the specific effect is performed in the ring (for example, white or blue at the first timing (for example, timing before reaching)). It is easy to be determined as the display mode of lower colors, and it is easy to be determined as the display mode of upper colors such as yellow and red at the second timing (for example, the timing after reaching) after the first timing. Etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine 1 can focus attention on the execution timing of the specific effect which suggests whether or not the display mode of the specific display changes, and can improve the player's interest.

  Further, in the above-described gaming machine 1, the hold display means may display a first hold display mode (for example, a display mode of a hold display displayed in a white display mode in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, The display mode of the hold display displayed in the blue display mode in the start winning storage display area 5HL, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the white display mode in the second start win storage display area 5HR, and the second start winning A display mode of the hold display displayed in blue display mode in the memory display area 5HR or a second hold display mode different from the first hold display mode (for example, yellow in the first start winning storage display area 5HL) The display mode of the hold display displayed in the display mode of 1, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the red display mode in the first start winning storage display area 5HL, the second start win storage display area 5 The hold display is displayed in the display mode of the hold display displayed in yellow in R or in the display mode of the hold display displayed in red in the second start winning storage display area 5HR, etc.) The display means may change the ratio of displaying the specific display in the predetermined area according to the display mode of the hold display displayed by the hold display means (for example, the first start winning storage display area 5HL, The specific display displayed in the active display area AHA as a display of the corresponding specific display is deleted depending on which display mode of the hold display when displayed in the second start winning storage display area 5HR. The ratio of whether or not to be displayed in the active display area AHA later in a display mode of a specific display different from the display mode before erasure may be different, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming machine 1 can focus attention on the hold display mode of the hold display before the specific display is displayed in the predetermined area, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In the above description, although the active display change effect (specific display change effect, specific effect) for the active display (specific display) has been described, the active display change effect for the on-hold display displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H The on-hold change effect may be executed, which is the same effect mode as in.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 42 and FIG. 43, for example, the execution ratio of executing the common effect described above as a suggestion effect that suggests a success effect and a failure effect differs, for example, after the hold display is displayed in a special mode. Suggested effects (eg, specific display change effects) for the active display (specific display) corresponding to the hold display after the hold display is displayed in a special mode. , Suggested staging that suggests common staging that is commonly performed with success staging and failure staging, whether the display mode of the specific display changes, or whether the display mode of the specific display is displayed (redisplayed) For example, it may be made to become high so that the execution rate which performs (indicates specific effect) in the same or different manner may be different.
In addition, when the display mode of the hold display displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 is a special mode, the active display change effect (with respect to the hold display displayed in the special mode) For example, it may be made to be high so that the execution rate at which the on-hold change presentation is performed in the same manner as or different from the specific display change presentation) may be different.

  In the above description, main notice effects such as active display change effects (specific display change effects) have been described, but when the main notice effects are not affected, notices such as other main notice effects and prefetch advance notice effects The presentation may be executed with the same change, or when the notice presentation such as other main notice effects and the advance notice effects is not affected, the main notice effect may be executed with the same change. . Here, when there is no influence, in the case of executing a plurality of advance notice effects (the main notice effect and the advance notice effect effect) in the change, the execution time for executing each notice effect is sufficient in the special figure change time of the change Or when a plurality of advance notice effects (main advance notice effects and preread advance notice effects) are executed in the variation, it is difficult for the player to see due to the effect mode of each advance notice effect.

  In the above description, although the active display change effect (specific display change effect) for the active display (specific display) has been described, for example, a character having a hammer for the hold effect for the hold display appears and the first hold display It is an effect mode that changes the display mode of the hold display by executing an action effect of striking with a hammer, or a total of nine types of decorative designs including eight types of alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” and one character image When configured, it may be an effect aspect in which the character pops out from the character image that is the decorative design and performs the action effect on the hold display of the target.

  In the above description, the display mode at the time of addition of the hold display has been described, but it is determined whether or not the display mode of the hold display displayed in the display mode at the addition is changed, and the display mode of the hold display is changed. The display mode of the hold display may be determined based on the setting example by the display mode determination table of the hold display as shown in FIG. 25 and FIG. 42, and the timing of changing the display mode of the hold display may be determined. The timing at which the display mode of the hold display is changed may be a predetermined timing such as the next change.

  In the above description, an effect mode in which the display mode of the active display is changed by a group of figures formed by a combination of plural figures as the first system change effect, and a display mode of the active display frame by the arrow as the second system change effect. Although the effect mode for changing the character is described, it is not necessary to be a figure or an arrow. For example, it is an effect mode for causing a character or the like to appear and changing a display mode of a special image including an active display or an active display frame. It is also good.

  In the above description, the display mode (display mode at the time of addition) of the hold display additionally displayed has been described as an example of white, but as in the setting example by the hold display mode determination table as shown in FIGS. The display mode of the hold display is determined to be additionally displayed in, for example, four colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, white) or five colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, white, gray) The display mode of the hold display may be determined so as to be additionally displayed by the display mode of three or less colors or six colors or more, or the color of the hold display or the drawn display is drawn. The display mode of the hold display may be determined to be additionally displayed by characters or symbols, or may be additionally displayed by the shape of the hold display (for example, heart shape, star shape, character type, pentagon, triangle, etc.) See The display mode of the hold display may be determined, or the display mode of the hold display may be determined to be additionally displayed by the movement of the hold display (for example, the movement pattern of the character in the character-type hold display). It is also good.

  In the above description, although the active display change effect (specific display change effect) for changing the display mode of the active display (the display mode of the specific display) has been described, the first start winning memory display area 5HL or the second start A hold change effect may be executed to change the display mode of the hold display displayed in the winning storage display area 5HR from the display mode at the time of addition. In this case, the display mode of the hold display of a plurality of colors or the display mode of the hold display additionally displayed due to the shape of the hold display may be changed to a display mode different from the display mode at the time of addition.

  In the above description, the active display (specific display) may be erased from the image display device 5 immediately before the final stop of the decorative symbol, or at the timing when the variation of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display area 5L is stopped. The active display (specific display) may be erased, or the active display (specific display) may be erased at a timing after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, and the decorative symbol is an image display device in a reach mode. The timing before it is displayed on 5 and the timing after the decorative pattern is displayed on the image display device 5 in the reach mode, and the decorative pattern is displayed on the image display device 5 in the non-reach mode not to be the reach mode In the prior timing displayed on the image display device 5 in a non-reach mode in which the decorative pattern does not become a reach mode, or in a pseudo continuous variation Active display (specific display) from the active display area at any timing among multiple specific display erasing timings such as the timing before the chans design is displayed or the timing before the chance symbol is displayed in the pseudo random change You may make it erase | eliminate.

  In the above description, after the common effect is performed on the active display (specific display) displayed in the active display area AHA, a special representing information including the active display corresponding to the on-hold display corresponding to the variable display Although an example of executing a failure effect which does not change the display mode of the special image representing the information including the success effect for changing the display mode of the image and the active display corresponding to the suspension display corresponding to the variable display has been described After executing the common effect commonly executed for the success effect and the failure effect for any of the hold displays displayed in the memory display area 5H, the success play or hold for changing the display mode of the hold display You may perform the failure rendering which does not change the display mode of a display.

In addition, after making a success effect or a failure effect for any of the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H, the hold display becomes the variable display, and according to the hold display corresponding to the variable display A success rendition or a failure rendition may be further performed on the special image representing the information including the active display.
In this case, for example, when there is a start winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, each of the hold display displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H in step S160 or step S163 in FIG. On the other hand, the presence or absence of successful rendering or failure rendering for the pending display, the presentation mode, the execution timing to execute the presentation, the display mode of the pending display, etc. are determined according to the variation category, and further the active display corresponding to each pending display As shown in FIG. 10, the presence or absence of execution of success rendering or failure rendering for the special image representing the information including the active display at the time of occurrence, the presentation mode, the display mode of the special display, etc. The determined contents may be stored in the first prefetch notice buffer 194C and the second notice buffer 194D.

  In the above description, although the second system change effect of the effect mode by the arrow Y2 in which the character of "superheat" is drawn is described as an example, the character may not be drawn in the arrow Y2, or the other A character may be drawn or a character or the like may be drawn. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of effect modes as the second system change effect, the success effect is selected depending on which of the plurality of types of second system change effects the effect mode of the second system change effect is selected. The degree of expectation to be executed may be different. In addition, the second system change effect may be an effect that suggests the display mode of the special image after the success effect is performed depending on the effect mode of the second system change effect.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the apparatus configuration and data configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the processing shown by the flowchart, various rendering operations including the display operation of effect images in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. Can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  For example, when the display mode of the active display displayed in the active display area AHA is a special mode, even if the hold change effect is executed on any of the hold displays displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H. If there is a hold display displayed in a special mode in any of the hold display displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H, any of the hold display displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H or the active display Alternatively, the on-hold change presentation or the active display change presentation may be executed.

  For example, either the first system change effect or the second system change effect may be an effect of changing the color of the active display in the display mode of the active display. In this case, for example, it is displayed on the hold display displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H like a first system change effect for changing the shape or a second system change effect for changing the thickness of the line of the active display frame. The display mode of the active display so that the display mode of the color (for example, a color such as yellow or red in the case of the hold display that has been displayed in blue) is higher than the color of the hold display You can change the color in

  For example, as shown in FIG. 29A to FIG. 29 for each color of the active display, for example, the degree of expectation for the successful rendering to be performed differs depending on the color of the active display included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA. A setting example of the determination ratio of the effect mode set as in (C) may be used, or a successful effect on the active display is executed by the color of the active display included in the special image displayed in the active display area AHA. The setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode set so that the determination ratio of the display mode of the active display such as the color of the active display after being set may be different may be used.

  For example, 45% of the active display change effects of the variation pattern "PA4-X" in the setting example of the determination ratio by the active display change effect execution presence / absence determination table in FIG. (The sum of 15% of the first system change effect, 10% of the second system change effect, 20% of the first system change effect and the second system change effect) vs. 55% A ratio may be set for each of them, and the ratio of “execution present” and “execution not present” is 0% to 100% as in the fluctuation pattern “PA1-X” in FIG. The ratio according to may be set such that any one of the plurality is set as 0%.

  For example, in the probability variation control, a gaming machine may be provided in which a specific area is provided in advance in the big winning opening, and this particular area is controlled to be in the probability variation state based on passage of the gaming ball. For example, based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the game ball enters a specific area in the big winning opening by being assigned to multiple types of big hit types such as "non-probable change", "probable change" It may be a gaming machine which is controlled to be in the easy gaming state and is controlled to be in the positive changing state based on the passage of the gaming ball through this specific area.

  It should be noted that at which of a plurality of timings a specific effect is suggested (wandering) which suggests (wander) whether the display mode of the specific display changes or whether the specific display is displayed (redisplayed) or not The ratio of whether or not the specific display is displayed may be different depending on

  In the case where the specific display is the red display mode, an example in which the active display change effect or the specific display change effect is not performed has been described, but for example, a "rainbow color" display mode is provided above red. The display mode of the specific display of “red” may be changed to the display mode of the specific display of “rainbow color” by executing the active display change effect or the specific display change effect. In addition, the display mode of the specific display such as white, blue and yellow may be changed to the display mode of the specific display of “rainbow color”.

  In the above description, in the first holding effect determination process of step S160 of FIG. 23 and the second holding effect determination process of step S163, the display mode of the specific display and the timing for deleting the specific display, and after the deletion An example of determining the display timing etc. has been described, but for example, these determinations are performed by other processes such as the variable display start waiting process of step S170 of FIG. 22 and the variable display start setting process of step S171. It is also good.

  The setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the specific display by the display mode determination table of the specific display shown in FIG. 40 and the determination ratio of the display mode of the specific display by the display mode determination table of the specific display shown in FIG. Taking the setting example as the setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the specific display by the display mode determination table of one large specific display, in the first hold effect determination process in step S160, etc., FIG. The first hold display displayed in the display mode at the time of addition based on the display mode at the time of addition determined based on any of the hold display mode determination table and the display mode determination random number MR6 for the first hold display To display in the active display area AHA a specific display corresponding to the variable display to be executed based on the establishment of the start condition of the hold information corresponding to the A When to clear the specific display displayed on AHA, whether or not the deleted specific display is redisplayed on the active display area AHA, and how to display the specific display when redisplaying the specific display on the active display area AHA A process of determining with reference to a setting example of the determination ratio of the display mode of the specific display by the display mode determination table of the specific display as shown in 26 may be executed.

  In addition, with respect to the hold display displayed in the first start winning storage display area 5HL and the second start winning storage display area 5HR and the specific display displayed in the active display area AHA, a plurality of stages of hold change effects and a specific display, respectively. A change effect (active display change effect) or a specific effect (indication effect) may be performed.

  In addition, after the specific display is erased from the active display area AHA at a predetermined timing, the specific timing after the predetermined timing to display the specific display in the active display area AHA is, for example, reach pattern to the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The timing before the decorative symbol is displayed, the timing after the decorative symbol is displayed in the reach pattern in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the timing before the chance symbol is displayed in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, the timing in the pseudo continuous fluctuation It may be a plurality of timings such as the timing after the symbol is displayed.

  The specific timing after the specific timing to display the specific display in the active display area AHA after the pending display is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H at a predetermined timing is, for example, reach to the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The timing before the decoration pattern is displayed in the mode, the timing after the decoration pattern is displayed in the reach mode in the decoration pattern display areas 5L and 5R, the timing before the chance pattern is displayed in the pseudo run change, the pseudo run change There may be a plurality of timings such as the timing after the chance symbol is displayed.

  Note that the specific display is erased at one or both of a predetermined timing at which the specific display is erased from the active display area AHA and a specific timing after the predetermined timing at which the specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA. A voice (sound and voice) may be output (reproduced) to the player using the speaker 8 that the deleted specific display is displayed.

  Note that the pending display is erased at one or both of the predetermined timing at which the pending display is erased from the start winning storage display area 5H and the specific timing after the specific timing at which the specific display is displayed in the active display area AHA. A voice (sound and voice) may be output (reproduced) to the player by using the speaker 8 that the temporarily displayed suspension display is displayed as the specific display.

  In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the processing shown in the flowchart, and various rendering operations including the display operation of effect images in the display area of the image display device 5 deviate from the spirit of the present invention. As long as it does not, it is possible to change and modify arbitrarily.

  For example, a gaming machine controlled to a definite changing state after a big hit game is shown based on the fact that there is a definite variation big hit as a big hit type or a normal big hit and is determined to be a big variation as a big hit type. It is not limited. For example, a special variable winning prize ball device having a predetermined probability variation area provided therein (a probability variation area may be provided in a special variable prize winning ball device provided with only one, or a plurality of special variable winning prize balls provided The probability change area may be provided in a part of the device, and the probability change is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed the probability change area in the special variable winning prize ball device during the big hit game, the big hit game The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines that are controlled to a definite change state after the end.

  Also, for example, although the game machine uses game media as an example, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a game medium as a predetermined number of prizes, but may be a game medium such as a game ball The present invention can also be applied to a sealed type game machine which gives a score when the condition for providing a premium is satisfied.

  Further, in the above description, in order to notify the CPU for effect control 120 of a fluctuation pattern indicating a fluctuation mode such as the fluctuation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of the pseudo ream, one fluctuation pattern command is Although the example which transmits is shown, you may make it notify fluctuation | variation pattern to CPU120 for production control by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the CPU 103 is in a first command before reaching reach (preceding so-called second stop when not reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo-sequence, presence or absence of slip effect) Send command showing fluctuation time and fluctuation mode), and after reaching reach such as reach type and presence of re-lottery effect in the second command (after the so-called second stop when it does not reach) The command may be transmitted to indicate the fluctuation time or the fluctuation mode of. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 may perform effect control in the variable display based on the change time derived from the combination of two commands. The CPU 103 may notify the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control CPU 120 may select a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that needs to be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

  In the above description, the “ratio” is not limited to one having a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, and A: B = 100%. Those having a relationship such as 0%, that is, one having 100% allocation and the other having 0% allocation are also included in the “percentage”. For example, when the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the specific display result is to be displayed in a predetermined area at a "higher percentage" than when the specific display result is not derived and displayed. When the specific display is displayed in the predetermined area when the derived display is performed and the specific display is not derived, the specific display is not displayed in the predetermined area, or when the specific display result is derived as the display result of the variable display When the specific display result is derived and displayed, the ratio at which the specific display is displayed in the predetermined area is 70%, and when the specific display is not derived and displayed, the ratio at which the specific display is not displayed in the predetermined area is 30%, etc. Is included.

  For example, using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified by recording information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card, a game score given for use in a game is given, and a given game is given The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by striking a gaming ball enclosed in a gaming machine into a gaming area using a score or a gaming score given by winning a game.

  That is, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, variable display means is provided to perform variable display of plural types of identification information that can be identified respectively, and to display the display result. It is a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a specific display result defined in advance is displayed on the display means, but when the gaming score is not 0, the gaming score is used in the gaming machine The game is performed by driving the game ball enclosed in the game area into the game area, the game score is subtracted according to the game ball being thrown, and the game score is obtained according to the game ball winning in the winning area provided in the game area The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines that add. Such a game machine has a game recording medium insertion slot for inserting a game recording medium in which information capable of specifying the size of a game value usable for addition of game scores is recorded, and a game recording The game recording medium processing means may be provided for reading out the record information recorded on the game recording medium inserted into the medium insertion slot.

  Further, in the above description, when the fluctuation is started in order to notify the effect control microcomputer (the effect control CPU 120) of the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of the pseudo sequence. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the gaming control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) does not reach the reach before reaching the reach (such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect in the first command) Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the so-called second stop to the second command, and after reaching reach (such as reach type and presence / absence of re-lottery effect) May transmit a command indicating a variation time or a variation mode) after so-called second stop. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the variable display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the fluctuation time by each of two commands, and the effect control microcomputer selects a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. It is also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending the first command, after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed / provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the computer device etc. may be previously provided. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

1 ... pachinko gaming machine 2 ... gaming board 3 ... gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... special symbol display device 5 ... image display device 5 HL ... 1st start prize memory display area 5HR ... 2nd start prize memory display area 5H ... start prize Memory display area 6A ... ordinary winning ball device 6B ... ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... special variable winning ball device 8 ... speaker 9 ... lamp 11 ... main board 12 ... effect control board 13 ... voice control board 14 ... lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... normal symbol display 21 ... gate switch 22A ... 1st starting opening switch 22B ... 2nd starting opening switch 23 ... count switch 31A ... stick controller 31B ... push button 100 ... microcomputer for game control 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling in an advantageous state for the player,
Holding storage means for storing information on variable display as holding storage;
Hold display means for performing a hold display corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means;
And special image display means for displaying variable display hand at the commencement of the special image in accordance with the hold display corresponding to the variable display in a predetermined area,
A common effect that is commonly executed when changing the display mode of the special image during variable display execution and when the display mode of the special image is not changed, and can be performed a plurality of times during execution of the variable display And effect executing means capable of executing a success effect of changing the display mode of the special image to any of a plurality of types after executing the common effect or a failure effect of not changing the display mode of the special image;
Equipped with
Among the plurality of timings including the first timing during the execution of one variable display and the second timing after the first timing, the special image is selected depending on at which timing the common effect is to be executed. The ratio of changing the display mode to any of the display modes is different, and when the common effect is executed at the second timing, the common effect is executed at the first timing than when the common effect is executed. There is a high percentage of successful staging being performed,
The second timing is a timing after the one variable display modes can become reach aspect,
A game machine characterized by